JP6515906B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are provided with control means such as a CPU, read-only storage means such as a ROM, and read / write storage means such as a RAM. The control means executes processing in accordance with the program read from the read only storage means while writing information to the read / write storage means and reading information from the storage means. When executing this process, information from a sensor or the like is input to the control means, and information from the control means is output to the electric actuator, the light emitting element, or the like. It is also known that control means, read-only storage means, read / write storage means, etc. are integrated into one chip.

  With regard to the slot machine, specifically, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are betted, a lottery process of winning is performed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process of the winning combination is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and the control means is operated when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel. At this time, the rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player. For example, game media are provided as the provision of the benefit (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-045989, A

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a pattern display means for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means operated to start variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
The role lottery means for executing the lottery process of the role based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means operated to stop the variation display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
When the start operation means is operated and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the pattern is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Pattern display control means for controlling the display means;
After the change display of the pattern, when the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as formation of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination Execution means,
Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
In the gaming machine provided with
A predetermined profit is awarded with at least one condition that the first winning combination is won in the lottery process of the above-mentioned winning combination or that the first corresponding winning combination corresponding to the first winning combination is won. Providing a predetermined profit giving means;
The probability that the first combination is won and the predetermined profit is given is the same or substantially the same among the setting values of the plurality of stages,
The second combination is present as the combination to be drawn in the lottery process of the combination,
When the second corresponding winning corresponding to the second combination is established, the first corresponding symbol which is any one of the pattern and the combination of the symbols to be stopped when the first corresponding winning is established is stopped and displayed. And
When the second combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the first corresponding symbol is not displayed in a stop display, but a stop display when the first combination is won Another corresponding pattern which is any of a pattern and a combination of patterns that can not be displayed can be stopped and displayed,
When the second combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the case where the first corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed is more advantageous for the player than the case where the other corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed,
The probability of winning the second combination when the gaming status is a predetermined status is different between the first set value and the second set value included in the plurality of set values,
The probability of winning the second combination may be varied according to the game situation .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view of a slot machine showing the state where the front door was opened. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design and combination line which can be visually recognized from a display window part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. It is an electric block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed by main side MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal modes. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning condition established when the normal mode lottery table is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st RT mode lottery table. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning condition established when the first RT mode lottery table is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT modes. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning condition established when the second RT mode lottery table is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB. It is a flowchart which shows the reel rotation process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop preparation process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop information setting process performed by main side MPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the area for priority information. It is a flowchart which shows the priority order information creation process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the prize determination processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a prize performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the slip number acquisition process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the response | compatibility process at the time of the game end performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for BB states performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer opportunity management process performed by main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows ART preparation state processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ART state process performed by main side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship of the transition probability to the AT state in a non-BB state, and a setting value, (b) The relationship between the addition probability of the number of continuation games in an AT state, and a setting value It is explanatory drawing for, and is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship of the advantageous winning probability and setting value in (c) BB state. It is a flow chart which shows transition processing of lottery mode performed by main side MPU in a 2nd embodiment. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the promotion lottery table, (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining the transition winning probability in the low probability mode, (c) The transition winning probability in the high probability mode is explained FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of the design and combination line which can be visually recognized from the display window part in 3rd Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of main line in the case where watermelon winning is achieved in the case of index value IV = 4 in a non-BB state, and index value IV = 2 in a BB state, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of main line in the case where watermelon winning is achieved in the case of index value IV = 5 in a non-BB state, and index value IV = 3 in a BB state. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship of the transition probability to the AT state in a non-BB state, and a setting value, (b) The relationship between the addition probability of the number of continuation games in an AT state, and a setting value It is explanatory drawing for, and is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship of the advantageous winning probability and setting value in (c) BB state. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship of the transition probability to the AT state in a non-BB state, and a setting value in 4th Embodiment, (b) Addition probability and the setting number of continuation games in AT state It is an explanatory view for explaining a relation with a value, and is an explanatory view for explaining a relation between an advantageous winning probability and a setting value in (c) BB state. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal modes in 5th Embodiment, It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for (b) BB. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the prize mode in 6th Embodiment, and the privilege provided. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT modes. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an additional performed by main side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st addition table, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 2nd addition table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an addition performed by the main side MPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an addition performed by the main side MPU in 8th Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st addition table, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 2nd addition table. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal modes in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning condition established when the normal mode lottery table is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT modes. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning condition established when the second RT mode lottery table is selected. (A) It is a front view of a special figure display part, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a special display part. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the alerting | reporting content in an image display apparatus, and the alerting | reporting content in a special display part. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting control processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for alerting | reporting performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an additional performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for dummy alerting | reporting performed by main side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship of the addition probability of the continuation game number in an AT state, and a setting value, and (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a dummy alerting | reporting table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the dummy alerting | reporting table in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an addition performed by the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship of the addition probability of the continuation game number in an AT state, and a setting value, and (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a dummy alerting | reporting table. It is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of a special display part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an addition performed by the main side MPU in 12th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a dummy alerting | reporting table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an additional performed by the main side MPU in 13th Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship of the addition probability of the continuation game number in an AT state, and a setting value, and (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a dummy alerting | reporting table.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a slot machine, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape opened forward as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels. A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so that the internal space of the housing 11 can be opened and closed with the left side portion as a pivot. The front door 12 is locked so as not to be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back of the front door 12. The locked state is released by an unlocking operation of the key cylinder 14 with a predetermined key.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 for notifying the player of the game state is provided on the upper side of the central portion of the front door 12. In the game panel 20, three vertically long display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R are formed in a line. The display windows 21L, 21M, 21R are made of a transparent or semi-transparent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate, and the reel unit 31 is attached to the top of the partition plate. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M and a right reel 32R which are respectively formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotational axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are disposed on the same axis extending substantially in the horizontal direction, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are in one-to-one correspondence with the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. In addition, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surface of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is projected as if it were moving from the top to the bottom through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor (not shown), and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually, ie independently, by driving the stepping motors. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the lower left side of the game panel 20, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. When the start lever 41 is operated while medals are betted, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate all at once.

  On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43 and 44 are provided which are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M and 32R. The stop buttons 42, 43 and 44 are disposed immediately below the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M and 32R to be stopped. The respective stop buttons 42, 43 and 44 can be stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed after the left reel 32L starts to rotate.

  The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, and medals are awarded. And until the execution of various processes such as management of the game state is completed, corresponds to one game (game time).

  On the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. The medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 is guided to the hopper device 53 if the acceptance is permitted by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 as shown in FIG. The medal discharge port 58 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 guides the medal receiver 59. The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiver 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a prize corresponding to the addition of the game medium is established on the activated line. There is.

  Below the medal insertion slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided which is pressed when the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 is jammed in the selector 52. In addition, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R, a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting a credited virtual medal and a maximum amount of bets which can be bet at one time, and two virtual medals at one time And a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time.

  A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing the surplus insertion medals and the payout medals at the time of winning as the predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) as virtual medals. When the settlement button 51 is operated under the situation where it is stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal discharge port 58 as a real medal.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 operated at the time of power on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting state of the slot machine 10 from "setting 1" A setting key insertion hole 57 operated to change in the range of setting 6 "is provided.

<The symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R>
Next, the symbols attached to the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

  FIG. 3 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. As shown in FIG. 3, 20 symbols are arranged in a line on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Moreover, although the number is attached to "0"-"19" corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, these numbers are the states which the main control apparatus 70 can visually recognize from display window part 21L, 21M, 21R. And the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not actually attached. However, the following description will be made using the corresponding numbers.

  As a symbol, "bell" symbol (for example, 19th of left reel 32L), "watermelon" symbol (for example, 18th of left reel 32L), "cherry" symbol (for example, 17th of left reel 32L), " "Replay" symbol (for example, 16th of left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 15th of left reel 32L), "LUCKY" symbol (for example, 13th of left reel 32L), "red 7" symbol (for example For example, there are eight types of the 12th of the left reel 32L and the "white 7" symbol (for example, the 10th of the left reel 32L). And as shown in FIG. 3, the number and arrangement | positioning order of various symbols in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are completely different.

  FIG. 4 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. Each of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R is formed such that among the twenty symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R, there are three symbols which allow the entire symbol to be visible. For this reason, in the state where all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols become visible through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

  In the slot machine 310, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle design of the left reel 32L, the middle design of the middle reel 32M, and the middle design of the right reel 32R. The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started with a prescribed number of medals bet, and when the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, a benefit of paying out the medal, re-playing Any of the profit and the transition of the gaming state is awarded.

  That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which winning can be established. The main line ML is set as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the upper line pattern of left reel 32L, the subline SUL1 connecting middle step pattern of middle reel 32M and the lower line pattern of right reel 32R, the upper line pattern of left reel 32L, the upper line pattern of middle reel 32M and the upper pattern of right reel 32R The subline SUL2 connected, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the subline SUL3 connecting the lower symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R Even if a combination of symbols to be won is established on a line extending along a straight line such as the subline SUL4 connecting the upper symbols of the symbol, the winning will not be established.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 5, the correspondence between the combination of symbols to be awarded and the benefit to be awarded in the event of winning will be described. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view for explaining the correspondence between a combination of symbols to be won and a benefit to be awarded when the symbol is won.

  As a small winning combination in which medals are paid out, there are a first compensation winning, a second compensating winning, a third compensating winning, a bell winning, a watermelon winning and a cherry winning. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "BAR" symbol or the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, of the right reel 32R If the stop symbol is a "bell" symbol, it will be the first compensation prize. In addition, on mainline ML, the stop symbol of left reel 32L is either "watermelon" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol, the stop symbol of middle reel 32M is "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of right reel 32R is If it is a "bell" symbol, it will be the second compensation prize. Further, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, It will be the third compensation prize. When one of the first compensation winning to the third compensation winning becomes, the number of objects to be provided with game media becomes "1".

  When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the bell prize is won It becomes. When a bell prize is won, the number of objects to be provided with game media is "9".

  When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML It becomes. When the watermelon wins, the number of objects to be provided with game media is "7".

  When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML becomes the "cherry" symbol, it is a cherry winning even if the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R are both. In the case of a cherry winning, the number of objects to be provided with game media is "2".

  A normal replay prize, a first RT replay prize, a second RT replay prize, a first fall replay, as a prize provided with a replay bonus that allows the player to play the next game without betting medals (or virtual medals). There is a prize and the second fall replay prize. Specifically, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol In the case, you usually get a Replay prize. If the stop symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol, the first RT It becomes a replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol, the second RT It becomes a replay prize. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol, the first It will be a fall replay prize. If the stop symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol, the second It will be a fall replay prize.

  When one of the above-described replay wins, it becomes possible to play the next game while making the bet unnecessary for both the medal and the virtual medal. Specifically, when any of the replay wins in a game in which three bets of medals are made, the game of the next game may be started in a bet of three sheets, making betting unnecessary for both medals and virtual medals. It becomes possible.

  Further, among the various replay wins, the first RT replay win, the second RT replay win, the first fall replay win, and the second fall replay win are not only the opportunity to give the replay win bonus but also the transition to the gaming state. Become. In the slot machine 10, a plurality of types of gaming states are set such that the types of winning combinations to be selected for the lottery and the winning probability of each combination are different in the lottery process of the winning combinations. Occurs when a replay prize that is a trigger is established.

  There are a first BB prize and a second BB prize as state transition prizes in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is "red 7" If it is a symbol, it will be the first BB prize. In the case where the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol , It will be the 2nd BB prize. When the first BB winning or the second BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

  The BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be provided per unit game count is higher than in the normal mode described later and in the non-AT state (this state is also referred to as a normal gaming state). Furthermore, the BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be provided per unit game count is higher than any gaming state other than the BB state. Specifically, the player is made to be able to establish a bell prize, and is elected with a higher probability (for example, about 1 / 1.3) than in the case of other gaming states, and each reel 32L when the player is elected , 32M, 32R, and the bell winning is established regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational position of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The BB state continues over a plurality of games, and ends when the end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. Although the end condition is arbitrary, it is set as the end condition that the total number of gaming media provided after the BB state is started is equal to or more than the end reference number (for example, “350”) in the slot machine 10 There is.

<A device for performing various notification and various effects>
Next, an apparatus for executing various types of notification and various types of effects will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided on the upper portion of the front door 12 and an image display device 63 is provided. The upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a mode corresponding to the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, and is controlled to emit light in a mode corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so as to perform a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63. The speakers 62 are provided as a left-right pair, and sound output is controlled so that a sound or a voice corresponding to the abnormality is output when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, and a sound or a voice corresponding to a winning result Sound output is controlled so as to be output. In addition, the sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled so that the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63 is performed.

  The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, and may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is display-controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning result of the combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface.

  Credit panel 65 that displays the number of virtual medals stored and stored on display panel 21L, 21M, 21R on game panel 20 of front door 12, and it became an object of grant at the time of a small winning combination An assigned number display unit 66 for displaying the number of game media is provided. These display units 65 and 66 are constituted by 7-segment displays, and for each segment, a single-color light emitting type LED such as green is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and some or all of the display units 65 and 66 are configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display It is also good.

<Various control devices>
The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to the back plate of the housing 11. The main control device 70 is configured such that the main control substrate 71 is accommodated in a substrate box. In the case of opening the substrate box, it is necessary to release the fastening state, and a fractured part will occur when the fastening state is released. By checking the presence or absence of the broken portion, it is possible to simply check whether the substrate box has been opened.

  The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 80 in addition to the main control device 70. The effect control device 80 is disposed on the front door 12 so as to be superimposed behind the image display device 63. The effect control device 80 executes control of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 based on the command received from the main control device 70. In the same manner as the main control device 70, the effect control device 80 is configured such that the control substrate is accommodated in the substrate box.

<Electric Configuration of Slot Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The main control device 70 has a main control board 71 which controls the main control of the game. The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71. The MPU 72 is a ROM 73 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 72 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A certain RAM 74, a clock circuit 75 for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, etc. are incorporated. The fact that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 72 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip.

  The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor for individually detecting that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a for detecting the operation of the start lever 41, Stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a for individually detecting the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, respective credit insertion buttons 47, 48, 49 Of the credit input detection sensor 47a, 48a, 49a which individually detects the operation of the payback detection sensor 51a which detects the operation of the settlement button 51, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, the reset detection sensor 56a which detects the operation of the reset button 56. , The setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 And various sensors such as setting the key detection sensor 57a for detecting are connected to it, these signals from the sensors are input to the MPU 72.

  On the output side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R), a selector drive unit 52a provided in the selector 52, a payout motor of the hopper device 53, and effects A control device 80 and the like are connected. In each game, the MPU 72 performs rotational drive control of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31. As already described, the selector 52 detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if acceptance is permitted and then guides it to the hopper device 53, and if the acceptance is prohibited, the inserted medal It has a function of discharging to the medal tray 59 without detection by the detection sensor 45a. The selector drive unit 52a has a function to switch the state of the selector 52 between the acceptance permission state and the acceptance prohibition state. Specifically, the position for acceptance of the passage switching piece provided in the selector 52 is used. Operate between the and the position for no reception. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state by switching the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a. Further, the MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when the small winning combination is established and the payout of the medal is executed. Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 80 at each timing of each game.

  The power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply unit 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies drive power to the main control unit 70 and other electronic devices in the slot machine 10 and a power failure monitoring circuit, and the power failure monitoring circuit applies power to the power supply unit from an external power supply. The voltage which is being monitored is monitored, and a power failure signal is output to the MPU 72 when the voltage falls below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing by receiving a power failure signal, and enables recovery to the processing state before the power failure after power recovery. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power-off power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power-off power in a situation where supply of operation power from the external power supply is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, the data is stored and held in the RAM 74 in a state (for example, one day or two days) where backup power can be supplied by the power supply part during power interruption. Be done. However, by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 in a state where the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 is pressed, the data stored in the RAM 74 is initialized.

  The effect control device 80 includes a sub control board 81 for performing execution control of various types of notification and various types of effects. The MPU 82 is mounted on the sub control board 81. The MPU 82 is a ROM 83 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 82 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A certain RAM 84 is incorporated, and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  The fact that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 82 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip. Also, backup power is not supplied from the power supply unit of the power supply device 54 to the RAM 84 during interruption of the supply of operating power from the external power supply, but backup power is supplied to the RAM 84. It is also good.

  The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The MPU 72 of the main control apparatus 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82 as described above, and receives various commands from the MPU 72. An upper lamp 61, a speaker 62 and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. The MPU 82 executes the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display control of the image display device 63 based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, thereby various notification and various effects. To be done. In the following description, the MPU 72, the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, the main ROM 73 and the main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 82, the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 of the effect control device 80 are respectively described The MPU 82, the effect ROM 83, and the effect RAM 84 are referred to.

<Main processing of main MPU 72>
Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing started in the main MPU 72 when the supply of operation power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the main processing, first, initialization processing is executed (step S101). In the initialization process, the interrupt by the timer interrupt process is permitted, and further, various initializations are performed on the registers in the main MPU 72, the I / O device, and the like.

  After the initialization process is completed, it is determined whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the ON operation is performed (step S102). When the ON operation is performed (step S102: YES), if the reset button 56 is not ON when the power switch 55 is ON (step S103: NO), partial clear processing is executed. (Step S104) If the reset button 56 is turned on when the power switch 55 is turned on (Step S103: YES), all clear processing is executed (Step S105). That is, when the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed without performing the operation for initializing the main RAM 74, a partial clear process is executed, and the operation for initializing the main RAM 74 is performed. If done, all clear processing is executed.

  In the partial clear process, a partial area in the main RAM 74 is initialized, and in the all clear process, the entire area in the main RAM 74 is initialized. In the partial clear process, an area in which data indicating whether or not the BB state is stored in the main RAM 74, an area in which data indicating the total number of granted gaming media in the BB state is stored, or the AT state Of the main side RAM 74 except for the area where data indicating that is stored, the area where data for specifying the end condition of the AT state is stored, and the area where data indicating the type of lottery mode to be described later are stored. Clear the area to "0". In this case, the area in which the winning combination is stored is cleared to "0". In the all clear process, all areas in the main RAM 74 are cleared to “0”, including the area excluded from the execution target of “0” clear in the partial clear process. As a result, even if partial clear processing is executed, the BB state, AT state and lottery mode are maintained in the state before the power is turned off, and when all clear processing is carried out, regardless of the state before the power cut off. It becomes a normal game state.

  The present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and it may be configured not to be in the BB state when a partial clear process is executed when the power is shut off in the BB state. In the case where a partial clear process is executed when the power is shut off, the state may not be in the AT state. If the power is shut off in the first RT mode or the second RT mode described later, the partial clear process is performed. If executed, these RT modes may not be established. In addition, even if the partial clear process is executed, the area in which the data indicating that the BB role has been won is stored may not be cleared to “0”.

  After the process of step S104 or step S105 is performed, a winning probability setting process is performed (step S106). In the winning probability setting process, the current setting value is read on the condition that the setting key is inserted and the ON operation is performed, and the current setting value is displayed on the granted number display unit 66 provided on the gaming panel 20. Since the area for storing the data of the set value in the main side RAM 74 is surely initialized immediately before the winning probability setting process, the set value displayed on the granted number display unit 66 is set to "1". It is "1" corresponding to the value. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by one each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the setting value after the update is displayed on the number-of-grants display unit 66. When the reset button 56 is operated in a situation where the set value is the set value of “6”, the set value is updated to the set value of “1”. When the ON operation of the setting key is canceled after the start lever 41 is operated, the winning probability setting process is ended. In this case, the display of the setting value in the assignment number display unit 66 is ended. After the winning probability setting process is performed, the process proceeds to the normal process (step S107). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

  When the setting key ON operation is not performed in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process after step S108 is performed. The power recovery process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power is shut off. In the power recovery process, the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the set value of the slot machine 10 is normal (step S108). Specifically, when the set value is any of “1” to “6”, it is determined to be normal, and when it is “0” or “7” or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is checked whether "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S109). The power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the processing at the time of a predetermined power failure is normally executed when the supply of the operation power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped, the power failure flag is "1". Will be set. If "1" is set in the power failure flag, it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to confirm whether the value is normal or not.

  If all the steps S108 to S110 are affirmed, this means that the power failure process at the previous power failure has been normally executed. In this case, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is restored to the register of the main MPU 72. The state is restored to the state before the power is shut off (step S111). Further, the power failure flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). Thereafter, after a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery processing is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 (step S113), the address returns to the address before the power is turned off (step S114).

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, the operation inhibiting process is performed. In the operation inhibiting process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is inhibited (step S115), and all actuators connected to the output port are cleared by clearing all output ports of the main MPU 72 to "0". Is turned off (step S116), and error notification processing is performed to notify the hole manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S117). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the all clear process (step S105).

<Timer interrupt processing of main MPU 72>
Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 msec.

  In the register save process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is checked whether "1" is set in the power failure flag, and when "1" is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S203, and processing upon power failure is executed.

  The power failure flag is set when the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power failure process, it is first determined whether or not the transmission of the command has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, the present process is terminated to return to the timer interrupt process and the transmission of the command is completed. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is stored in the main RAM 74. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators not shown are turned off. Then, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated when the power failure is eliminated, and is stored in the main RAM 74, and the subsequent RAM access is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in preparation for the fact that the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed.

  When the power failure flag is not set in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, the watchdog timer clear processing is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S205, interrupt termination declaration processing is performed to enable setting of the next timer interrupt to the main MPU 72 itself. In step S206, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the respective stepping motors. In step S207, the state of various sensors connected to the input port is read, and a sensor monitoring process is performed to monitor whether the read result is normal or not. In step S208, it is monitored whether or not the release operation for releasing the error notification is performed, and when it is specified that the release operation for releasing the error notification is performed, the error notification is released. The anomaly notification cancellation command for the purpose side is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82. As a result, even if any type of abnormality notification is being performed, the abnormality notification is canceled. Note that when the reset button 56 is pressed in a situation where a predetermined lock operation is being performed on the key cylinder 14, a release operation for releasing the abnormality notification is performed.

  In step S209, timer operation processing is performed to reduce the values of the counters and timers. In step S210, a counter process is performed to externally output the result of counting the bet number of medals and the number of payouts. In step S211, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the effect MPU 82 is performed. In step S212, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port. In step S213, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 is restored to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72, respectively. Thereafter, in step S214, an interrupt permitting process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupting process is ended.

<Normal processing of main MPU 72>
Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  First, an interrupt permitting process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (step S301), and thereafter a start waiting process is performed (step S302). In the start waiting process, when any replay winning is generated in the previous game, an automatic insertion process is performed to make the same number of game media bet as the number of bets in the previous game. In addition, in the start waiting process, when the medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, if the current bet number is not more than “3” which is the maximum prescribed number, the bet number is incremented by 1 and the bet number Is greater than or equal to "3" which is the maximum prescribed number, the value of the credit counter provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by one. The credit counter is a counter for specifying the number of virtual medals stored and stored by the main MPU 72.

  In the start waiting process, when the automatic insertion process is not executed and any one of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 is operated, the credit for setting the bet number corresponding to the operation Execute response processing of input. In the credit insertion handling process, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, the maximum amount of gaming media bettable at that time is made to be bet, and the second credit insertion button 48 or When the 3 credit insertion button 49 is operated, a bet state corresponding to that is made to be made. In this case, when a virtual medal is used for the bet, a value for the number of virtual medals betted is subtracted from the credit counter. In addition, when virtual medals of the number necessary to set the bet number corresponding to the operated credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 are not stored and stored, bets can be made in relation to the virtual medals stored and stored. The maximum amount of gaming media is betted.

  In the start waiting process, when the bet number is equal to or more than the maximum prescribed number and the value of the credit counter of the main RAM 74 is equal to or more than the upper limit storage number (specifically, "50"), the acceptance prohibiting process is executed. In the reception prohibition process, the selector 52 is set in the reception prohibited state by stopping the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a. Thus, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal receiver 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. On the other hand, when the bet number is less than the maximum prescribed number or when the value of the credit counter is less than the upper limit storage number, the acceptance permission process is executed. In the reception permission process, the selector 52 is set to the reception permission state by starting the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a. Thus, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. In the start waiting process, when the settlement button 51 is operated and the automatic insertion process is not executed, the medal corresponding to the total number of the bet number and the value of the credit counter is via the medal discharge port 58. The hopper device 53 is driven and controlled to be discharged to the medal receiver 59. As a result, the game medium internally stored is paid out to the player as an actual medal.

  After execution of the start waiting process of step S302, it is determined whether the bet number of medals has reached the specified number ("3" in the present embodiment) (step 303), and the bet number has not reached the specified number. The process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). If the bet number has reached the specified number, it is determined whether the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, after the main line ML is validated, the acceptance prohibition process already described is executed (step S305). Thus, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal receiver 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. Thereafter, a lottery process for performing a lottery of a part in the current game is executed (step S306), and a reel rotation process for starting rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed (step S307). A reel stop process is performed to stop the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the case where the stop command is generated by the operation 44 (Step S308).

  Thereafter, medal payout processing is executed (step S309). In the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is established in the current game, a process for providing the player with medals or virtual medals of the number corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. Specifically, when a virtual medal is awarded, a value corresponding to the small winning combination is added to the credit counter, and when the value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit storage number, the upper limit storage number is exceeded. The hopper device 53 is controlled so as to pay out the medals for several minutes to the medal receiver 59.

  After that, a response process at the end of the game is executed to enable setting of the gaming state corresponding to the result of the current game (step S310). Then, the acceptance processing described above is executed (step S311). Thus, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

  The lottery process executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 10) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, a random number to be used when performing a success / failure determination of a winning combination is acquired (step S401). In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates a random number of 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 74. With this configuration, the random number can be acquired promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

  After the random number is obtained, the lottery table for performing the pass / fail determination of the winning combination is read out from the main ROM 73 (step S402). Here, in the slot machine 10, there are prepared in advance six probability of winning from the setting value of “1” to the setting value of “6”, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on. At the same time, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which lottery probability is to be executed based on which winning probability. The setting value of “n + 1” is higher than the setting value of “n” because the probability of winning the first and second BB roles that trigger transition to the BB state is higher than the setting value of “n”. The setting value of "n + 1" is advantageous to the player. Further, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery table is different in the main MPU 72 even in the case of setting values of the same stage, a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode. In addition, as a game state, a BB state exists separately from the state of each of these lottery modes. In step S402, a lottery table corresponding to a combination of the current setting value and the current gaming state is selected.

  The lottery table corresponding to each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode in the non-BB state will be described by taking the case of the setting value of “3” as an example. First, the normal mode lottery table selected in the normal mode will be described. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view for explaining the lottery table for the normal mode. In the following description, the explanatory view of FIG. 12 is referred to as appropriate.

  In the normal mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 11, index values IV are set, and in each index value IV, a winning combination is associated with each other and a point value PV is set. The point value PV defines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the free run counter.

  Specifically, bell winning data and first compensation winning data are set in the index value IV = 1. In the case of winning with index value IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first stop (reel on which the stop command is generated first) is the left reel 32L, the second stop target and the third stop target are Regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the bell winning is surely generated, and in the other case, the first compensating winning is surely generated.

  In the slot machine 10, reel control is performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can slide up to a maximum of four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, reel control is performed for each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to stop the operation until the specified time (190 msec) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to make it easier to achieve a prize corresponding to the winning combination, and to avoid that a prize corresponding to the combination not winning is established. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slipped is limited as described above, a combination of symbols for achieving a winning is formed on one reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44, if there are five or more symbols between the component symbols, it may happen that the component symbols do not stop on the main line ML (the event is also called "dropout") Say). The first compensation prize to the third compensation prize, the bell prize and the various replay prizes are prize modes in which no dropout occurs when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order, and the watermelon prize, the cherry prize and the third prize The 1BB prize and the second BB prize are prize modes in which a drop may occur depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  In the index value IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 11, bell winning data and second compensation winning data are set. When the index value IV = 2 is won, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, types and respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the second stop target and the third stop target. The bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop button 42 to 44, and in the other case, the second compensating winning is surely realized.

  As shown in FIG. 11, bell winning data and third compensating winning data are set in the index value IV = 3. When the index value IV = 3 is won, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, types and respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the second stop target and the third stop target. The bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop button 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the third compensating winning is surely realized.

  As shown in FIG. 11, only watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV = 4. In the case of winning with index value IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 12, watermelon winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the watermelon winning may not be established.

  In the index value IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 11, watermelon winning data and first compensation winning data are set. In the case of winning with the index value IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 12, the watermelon winning or the first compensation winning can be established regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, the establishment of the watermelon prize is given priority over the establishment of the first compensation prize. That is, when the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is the timing at which it is possible to establish watermelon winning, the watermelon winning is established, and the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44 can not establish the watermelon winning Thus, the first compensation prize is established when it is the timing at which the first compensation prize can be established. Depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, both the watermelon winning and the first compensation winning may not be established.

  As shown in FIG. 11, only cherry winning data is set to the index value IV = 6. In the case of winning with the index value IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 12, cherry winning may be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that the cherry winning is not established.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the first BB winning data is set to the index value IV = 7. In the case of winning with the index value IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 12, the first BB prize can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the first BB winning may not be established. Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the second BB winning data is set to the index value IV = 8. In the case of winning with the index value IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 12, the second BB winning may be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second BB winning is not established.

  Here, the winning data other than the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data is erased in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning is achieved, and is held in the games following the winning game. It does not go over. On the other hand, in the first BB win data and the second BB win data, a corresponding BB win is established even after the game after the winning game except when the main RAM 74 is cleared. Memory is kept until. In this case, in the game in which the first BB win data or the second BB win data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first BB win data and the second BB win data is excluded from the lottery targets. This makes it possible to prevent the BB winning data from being newly stored despite the fact that the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is already stored, and a plurality of BB winning data are accumulated. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the normal replay winning data and the first RT replay winning data are set to the index value IV = 9 to 12, respectively. In this case, when the index value IV = 9 is won, as shown in FIG. 12, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, and the second stop (the reel where the second stop command is issued) is the left reel 32L. If the third stop (reel where the stop command is finally generated) is the right reel 32R, the first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, otherwise In the above, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. When the index value IV = 10, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in the case other than that, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 11, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in the case other than that, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 12, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in the case other than that, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

  When the lottery table for the normal mode in FIG. 11 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 1, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 2, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 3 The probability of becoming is approximately 1 / 5.0, respectively, the probability of winning at index value IV = 4 and the probability of winning at index value IV = 5 are approximately 1/100 each. The probability of winning with index value IV = 6 is about 1/423, and the probability of winning with index value IV = 7 and the probability of winning with index value IV = 8 are respectively It is about 1/218, and the probability of winning in the index value IV = 9, the probability of winning in the index value IV = 10, the probability of winning in the index value IV = 11, and Probability of winning in the index value IV = 12 is about 1 / 28.0, respectively.

  Here, in the normal mode lottery table, as described above, first RT replay winning data is set as winning data with index value IV = 9 to 12 in addition to the normal replay winning data (see FIG. 11). The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is approximately 1 / 7.0. When the player wins with one of the index values IV = 9 to 12, the stop corresponding to the winning combination of the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. When the order is reached, the first RT replay winning is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 10) is the first RT mode lottery table.

  Next, the first RT mode lottery table selected in the case of the “setting 3” and the first RT mode will be described. 13 and 14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first RT mode lottery table.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 13, the winning combination data set to each of the index values IV = 1 to 8 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. It is the same as 11). In this case, the combination that enables the provision of gaming media is set to index value IV = 1 to 6, and the winning combination data and each winning probability set to each of index values IV = 1 to 6 are By being the same, the types of roles that enable the provision of game media and the winning probability of those roles are mutually the same in each of the normal mode and the first RT mode. Further, BB winning data is set to index values IV = 7 to 8 similarly to the normal mode lottery table, and the winning probability is the same as that for the normal mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning in any of the BB roles in the normal mode and the first RT mode is the same.

  The winning combination data set to index value IV = 9 or later is different from the normal mode. Specifically, in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 13, second RT replay winning data is set as winning data of index value IV = 9 to 12 in addition to normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is approximately 1 / 10.1. In the case of winning with index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 14, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The second RT replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In other cases, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 10, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. When the index value IV = 11, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. When the index value IV = 12, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In the first RT mode, the stop order corresponds to the winning combination in which the stop order of the first stop, the second stop and the third stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is won with one of index values IV = 9 to 12 and If the second RT replay winning is achieved, the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When shifting to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 10) is a lottery table for the second RT mode.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 13, as the winning data of the index value IV = 13 to 18, first fall replay replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 13-18 is approximately 1 / 10.9.

  When the index table IV is selected in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 14, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is In the case of the right reel 32R, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the first fall replay replay winning at the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 Certainly occur regardless of the situation. When the index value IV = 14 is won, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the first falling replay win occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 15, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the first falling replay win occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. If the index value IV = 16, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the first falling replay win occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 17, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the first falling replay win occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. If the index value IV = 18, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the first falling replay win occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the first fall replay winning combination is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When the mode is shifted to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 10) is the normal mode lottery table.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 19. The probability of winning in the index value IV = 19 is set higher than the probability of winning in other roles, and specifically, it is won in about 1 / 6.7. When the index value IV = 19 is won, the normal replay winning will be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R. .

  In the first RT mode lottery table, an index value IV of 9 to 19 is set to enable the establishment of the replay winning. Then, the winning probability of these winning combinations is set to the probability as described above, so that the winning probability (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) of the winning combinations enabling the establishment of the replay winning in the first RT mode is approximately 1 It is /2.9. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 7.0. That is, the first RT mode is a gaming state in which the probability of replay is higher than that in the normal mode.

  Next, the second RT mode lottery table selected in the case of the “setting 3” and the second RT mode will be described. 15 and 16 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the second RT mode lottery table.

  In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 15, the winning combination data set to each of the index values IV = 1 to 8 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the lottery table for normal mode 11) and the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 13). In this case, the combination that enables the provision of gaming media is set to index value IV = 1 to 6, and the winning combination data and each winning probability set to each of index values IV = 1 to 6 are By being the same, the types of roles that enable the provision of game media and the winning probability of those roles are mutually the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. In addition, BB winning data is set to index value IV = 7 to 8 similarly to the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the winning probability is the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery for the first RT mode. It is identical to the table. That is, the probability of winning in any of the BB roles in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode is the same.

  The winning combination data set to index value IV = 9 or later is different from the normal mode and the first RT mode. More specifically, in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 15, second fall replay replay win data is set as the win data of index value IV = 9 to 14 in addition to the normal replay win data. . The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 14 is approximately 1 / 5.5.

  In the case of winning with index value IV = 9 in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 16, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is In the case of the right reel 32R, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the second falling replay replay winning at the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 Certainly occur regardless of the situation. When the index value IV = 10, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning combination reliably occurs regardless of the operation timings of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 11, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning combination reliably occurs regardless of the operation timings of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 12, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning combination reliably occurs regardless of the operation timings of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 13, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning combination reliably occurs regardless of the operation timings of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 14 is won, the normal replay winning is performed when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning combination reliably occurs regardless of the operation timings of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the second fall replay winning combination is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 10) is the first RT mode lottery table.

  Only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 15 in the second RT mode lottery table. The probability of winning with the index value IV = 15 is set higher than the probability of winning with the other part, and specifically, it is won with about 1 / 6.3. When the index value IV = 15 is won, the normal replay winning is achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  In the second RT mode lottery table, an index value IV of 9 to 15 is set to a combination that enables establishment of a replay winning combination. Then, the winning probability of these winning combinations is set to the probability as described above, so that the winning probability (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) of the winning combinations enabling the establishment of the replay winning in the second RT mode is approximately 1 It is /2.9. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 7.0. That is, the second RT mode is a gaming state in which the probability of replay is higher than that in the normal mode. On the other hand, the replay probability in the first RT mode is approximately 1 / 2.9. That is, the second RT mode has the same replay probability as the first RT mode. However, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the replay probability in the first RT mode is the same as the replay probability in the second RT mode. For example, although the replay probability is slightly different between the first RT mode and the second RT mode The second RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the first RT mode, or the first RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the second RT mode.

  The lottery table for the normal mode, the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the lottery table for the second RT mode are set in one-to-one correspondence with each of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and the setting value is high. Although the winning probability of the BB combination is higher as it is, the replay probability set in each lottery mode is the same or substantially the same regardless of which setting value. In addition, in a situation where one of the BB roles has been won, the first BB role and the second BB may be in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode so that the BB roles are not won in duplicate. The part is excluded from the lottery object.

  In the main ROM 73, the BB lottery table to be referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 10) in the BB state other than the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table and the second RT mode lottery table It is memorized. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view for explaining a lottery table for BB.

  In the lottery table for BB, as shown in FIG. 17, only bell winning data is set to the index value IV = 1. When the player wins with the index value IV = 1, the bell winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Only watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV = 2. In the case of winning with the index value IV = 2, the watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the watermelon winning may not be established.

  Watermelon winning data and first compensation winning data are set to the index value IV = 3. In the case of winning with the index value IV = 3, the watermelon winning or the first compensation winning may be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, the establishment of the watermelon prize is given priority over the establishment of the first compensation prize. That is, when the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is the timing at which it is possible to establish watermelon winning, the watermelon winning is established, and the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44 can not establish the watermelon winning Thus, the first compensation prize is established when it is the timing at which the first compensation prize can be established. Depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, both the watermelon winning and the first compensation winning may not be established.

  Only cherry winning data is set to the index value IV = 4. In the case of winning with index value IV = 4, cherry winning can be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that the cherry winning is not established. Only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 5. When the index value IV = 5 is won, the normal replay winning is achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  When the BB lottery table is selected, the probability of winning at index value IV = 1 is approximately 1 / 1.3, and the probability of winning at index value IV = 2 is approximately 1/100. Yes, the probability of winning is about 1/22 when the index value IV = 3, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 4 is about 1/423, and when the index value IV = 5 The probability of winning is approximately 1 / 5.6. As a result, in the BB state, the expected number of game media to be provided per unit game number is higher than in other game states.

  Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 10), after selecting the lottery table (step S402), the index value IV is set to "1" (step S403), and the determination value DV used when determining the winning combination is set. (Step S404). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the first determination value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S401 is set as the current determination value DV, and a point value PV corresponding to “1”, which is the current index value IV, is added to the random number value. A new judgment value DV is set.

  After that, it is judged whether or not the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV (step S405). It is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds “65535” in the success or failure determination of the winning combination. If “65535” is exceeded, a winning data acquisition process for setting data of the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S406). In the winning data acquisition process, all the winning data set for the current index value IV in the reference lottery table is set in the main RAM 74. If the winning data is set, if the winning data is winning data other than BB winning data, “0” is cleared after the end of the current game regardless of the presence or absence of winnings corresponding to the winning data In the case of winning data, "0" is cleared when a winning is achieved.

  If the determination value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S405: NO), it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV has been dropped. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S407), and it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined as a yes or no (step S408). Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV incremented by one has exceeded the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined whether the determination is yes or no, the process returns to step S404, and the determination of the combination is continued. At this time, in step S404, a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used to determine the success or failure of the previous combination to obtain a new determination value DV. In step S405, it is determined whether the winning combination is successful or not based on the determination value DV.

  When the process of step S406 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S408, it means that the determination on the winning combination of the winning combination has ended. In this case, the process of determining effect content is executed (step S409). In the effect content determination process, a process for determining the content of the outline of the effect to be performed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in the current game is executed. As the contents of the outline, the high expectation content, the middle expectation content, and the low expectation content are set such that the expectation of occurrence of the BB state or the AT state described later gradually decreases. In the process of determining the contents of presentation, a lottery table corresponding to a combination of the condition as to whether or not to shift to the AT state within a predetermined number of games and the condition as the winning combination in this game The contents of the outline will be decided by lottery.

  The information corresponding to the contents of the large frame determined in the determination process of the effect content is set to the game start command, and the game start command is set as the transmission target to the effect MPU 82 (step S410). The game start command is a command for causing the effect MPU 82 to recognize that a new game has been started, and for causing the effect MPU 82 to recognize the contents of the outline of the effect determined by the main MPU 72. It is a command, and is transmitted to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  When the effect side MPU 82 receives the game start command, it grasps the contents of the outline of the effect in the current game from the game start command, and the contents of the details of the effect in a mode according to the contents of the outline of the effect thus recognized Determined by lottery. Then, a data table corresponding to the contents of the determined effect is read out from the effect side ROM 83 to the effect side RAM 84, light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62 and display of the image display device 63 according to the read data table Execute control.

  Thereafter, notification control processing is executed (step S411). In the notification control process, in the non-BB state and the AT state (or the ART state), the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enable the establishment of the bell winning when the index value IV = 1 to 3 is won. A process is performed to make it possible to execute a notification that allows the player to recognize the stop order. When the first RT replay winning data or the second RT replay winning data is set in the non BB state and in the AT state (or ART state), establishment of the set RT replay winning is possible. A process is performed to make it possible to execute a notification that allows the player to recognize the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, when the first fall replay win data or the second fall replay win data is set in the non-BB state and the AT state (or the ART state), the established fall fall replay avoidance is avoided A process is performed to make it possible to execute notification to make it possible for the player to recognize the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the. The notification for enabling the player to recognize the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started before the stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes possible in the corresponding game.

<Reel rotation processing>
Next, the reel rotation process of step S307 in the normal process (FIG. 9) will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  First, with reference to the winning data of the current game stored in the main RAM 74, the type of the offset designation table corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 10) in the current game is specified (step S501). The offset designation table is stored in advance in the main ROM 73. The offset designation table is a table in which various setting information for setting stop information used when stopping the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R is defined.

  Thereafter, basic information is set (step S502). Specifically, address information in the main ROM 73 of the pull-in bit table set in the offset designation table is set in the main RAM 74, and virtual payout upper limit information is set in the main RAM 74.

  Thereafter, the start interrupt process is permitted (step S503). The start-up interrupt process is included in the stepping motor control process of step S206 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 8), and the process of step S503 is performed in the reel rotation process, a series of processes in the stepping motor control process Start interrupt processing is started as a part of The timer interrupt process is started in a 1.49 msec cycle, so while the start interrupt process is permitted, the start interrupt process is also launched in about 1.49 msec cycle.

  In the start-up interrupt process, on condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R was started in the previous game, the condition for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is Start the rotation. Then, acceleration processing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in a predetermined acceleration mode, and when the acceleration processing is finished and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant speed rotation, constant speed rotation information is used as the main side. Set in the RAM 74.

  If the start-up interrupt process is permitted, stop preparation process is performed to set stop information of the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R (step S504). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not constant speed rotation information is set in the main side RAM 74, and the process waits in step S505 until constant speed rotation information is set. If the constant speed rotation information is set, execution of the start-up interrupt process is prohibited and the constant speed rotation information of the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S506).

  Next, stop preparation processing will be described. The stop preparation process is executed at step S504 in the reel rotation process (FIG. 18) as described above. In addition to this, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the stop instruction target are stopped based on the generation of the stop instruction for any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the reel stop processing (FIG. 25) described later It is performed in the situation where the process for making it run is performed. That is, the stop preparation process is executed using a period required for the rotation speed of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to reach a constant speed when a new game is started, and the reels 32L, 32M, during rotation It is executed using a period for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop instruction based on the generation of the stop instruction to 32R.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the stop preparation process. First, information indicating the right reel 32R is stored in the main RAM 74 as target reel information (step S601). Thereafter, it is determined whether a stop command has already been issued to a reel (hereinafter referred to as "target reel") indicated by the target reel information (step S602). If a stop command has not been issued, stop information setting processing is performed to set information for determining the symbol to be stopped at the base position for the current target reel (step S603). Thereafter, it is determined whether the current target reel is the left reel 32L (step S604). If the target reel is not the left reel 32L, the target reel information is updated (step S605). Specifically, when the right reel 32R is the target reel, the target reel is updated to the middle reel 32M, and when the middle reel 32M is the target reel, the target reel is updated to the left reel 32L. If the target reel information has been updated, the process returns to step S602 to set the stop information of the target reel.

  That is, in the stop preparation process, the process for setting the stop information is performed in the order of the right reel 32R → the middle reel 32M → the left reel 32L. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S604 that the target reel is the left reel 32L, it means that the stop information of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has been set, and the stop preparation processing is ended. Here, as described above, the stop preparation process is performed during the acceleration period of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and during the period when the stop control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is being performed. In this case, the process of step S603 is executed for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R during the acceleration period, and the stop command has not yet been generated during the period during which the stop control is being performed 1 The process of step S603 is performed on each or two reels.

  Next, the stop information setting process of step S603 in the stop preparation process will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S701, a stop command is generated for one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that is rotating among the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and a stop command is generated for the remaining two reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are rotating. In step S702, a stop command is generated for the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R in rotation among the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the rotation is in progress. It is determined whether or not a stop command has not been issued to the remaining one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If an affirmative determination is made in step S701, the first after-stop process is executed in step S703, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S702, a second after-stop process is performed in step S704. In the first post-stop processing and the second post-stop processing, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R (stopping reels 32L, 32M, 32R being stopped and the stop command are generated) for which stop commands have already been issued. In accordance with the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R), processing for changing a stop control table such as a pull-in bit table to be used thereafter is executed. If the process of step S703 is performed, if the process of step S704 is performed, or if the determination in step S702 is negative, priority order information creation process is performed (step S705).

  The priority information creation process will be described. In the priority order information creation processing, priority order information is created based on the stop positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R where the stop instruction has been issued, the winning situation of the winning combination, and the like. In creating the priority information, the priority information area 74a provided in the main RAM 74 is used.

  FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b) are explanatory diagrams for describing the priority information area 74a.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, the priority order information area 74a includes a large number of determination information buffers B. The determination information buffer B is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each symbol number of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, since symbols are respectively set for the symbol numbers of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R, it can be said that the determination information buffer B is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the respective symbols. Since twenty determination information buffers B are allocated to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the priority order information area 74a has a total of 60 determination information buffers B. Each determination information buffer B is formed of 1 byte, and the priority information area 74a has a total data capacity of 60 bytes.

  Each bit of the determination information buffer B has a function for storing specific determination information, individually or in a predetermined combination. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), the most significant seventh bit has a function as an unfair prize judgment bit for storing unfair prize information, and the sixth to third bits It has a function as a replay bit for storing gaming information and an acquired number bit for storing acquired number information, and a second bit is a replay bit for storing replay information, and a bonus It has a function as a feature bit for storing information, and the 1st to 0th bits have a function as a pull-in bit for storing pull-in bit information. In comparison and determination processing to be described later, the size of the priority information formed by the value of each bit of the determination information buffer B is compared and determined, and the stop symbol number is derived based on the largest priority information. For this reason, the priority information is the priority when stopping symbols, and the higher the priority number is, the higher the priority for stopping at the base position is, and the lower the priority information is, the higher priority position is for stopping at the base position. Lower priority.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing priority order information creation processing. First, the determination information buffer address of the target reel is acquired (step S801). That is, it is specified in the stop preparation process (FIG. 19) which one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the target reel set this time, and the symbols 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the number of symbols ( 20) The address of the determination information buffer B is acquired. Then, an initialization process is performed to initialize the data of each determination information buffer B corresponding to the address (step S802). In the initialization processing, basically, "1" is set to the 7th bit which is the unfair prize judgment bit and the 0th bit which is the lower side of the pull-in bit, and the other bits are "0". Do.

  Thereafter, data writing to the main side RAM 74 is performed so that the current target symbol number is "20" (step S803). Then, the value of the target symbol number written in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S804).

  Thereafter, a winning determination process is executed (step S805). Thereby, priority order information is created for the current target symbol number and the current target symbol number. When creating priority order information, it is assumed that the target symbol number of the target reel stops at the base position, and various conditions are considered for each bit of the determination information buffer B corresponding to the target symbol number. A process of storing information of "0" or "1" is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the target symbol number written in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S806). If it is not "0", the process returns to step S804 and the target symbol number in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1, and priority information is created for the target symbol number. That is, in the priority order information creation processing, assuming that each symbol number from 19th to 0th has stopped at the base position, priority information is created in order with respect to these symbol numbers. When it is determined in step S806 that the value of the target symbol number in the main side RAM 74 is "0", it means that the priority information has been created for all symbol numbers of the target reel. End the order information creation process.

  The winning determination process executed in step S805 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, line determination processing is executed (step S901). In the line determination process, when the stop command has already been issued, the symbol numbers on the main line ML are specified for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop command has already been issued. Further, the symbol number on the main line ML is specified for the current target reel. Then, based on the specified symbol numbers, the type of symbol or combination of symbols existing on the main line ML is identified.

  If there is no reel 32L, 32M, 32R for which a stop command has already been issued, it is assumed that the current target symbol number has stopped at the base position on the current target reel, and the main target reel is concerned. It is specified whether or not a symbol corresponding to a symbol number present on the line ML is a symbol corresponding to a winning combination, or whether there is a possibility of establishing a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination. The case where there are zero reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which a stop command has already been generated as described above occurs when the stop preparation process of step S504 in the reel rotation process (FIG. 18) is executed.

  If there is only one reel 32L, 32M, 32R for which a stop command has already been issued, a stop command has already been issued, assuming that the current target symbol number has stopped at the base position on the current target reel. Whether a symbol corresponding to each symbol number existing on the main line ML in each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the current target reel is a symbol corresponding to a winning combination or a symbol corresponding to a winning combination Identify whether there is a possibility of establishing a combination of As described above, when there is only one reel 32L, 32M, 32R for which a stop command has already been issued, the reel stop processing is performed in the situation where a stop command is issued for one reel 32L, 32M, 32R Occurs when 25) is executed.

  If there are two reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which a stop command has already been issued, the stop command has already been issued, assuming that the current target symbol number has stopped at the base position on the current target reel. Whether or not a symbol corresponding to each symbol number existing on the main line ML in each of the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the current target reel is a symbol corresponding to a winning combination or a winning combination It is specified whether or not there is a possibility of establishing a combination of corresponding symbols. As described above, when the line determination process is executed when there are two reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which stop commands have already been issued, one reel 32L, 32M, 32R has already stopped, This occurs when the reel stop processing (FIG. 25) is executed in a situation where a stop command is generated on one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  Thereafter, the unfair prize judgment processing is executed (step S902). Here, the unfair prize means that the combination of the symbols constituting the combination that is the object of the lottery is stopped on the main line ML despite the fact that the combination is not won. Then, in the unfair prize determination processing, the priority information is created so that the priority information is surely smaller than the symbol number where the unfair prize occurs, than the symbol number where the unfair prize does not occur. Specifically, all the bits of the determination information buffer B corresponding to the current target symbol number are cleared to "0". When an unfair prize occurs, the processing after step S903 is not executed for the current symbol number.

  After executing the unfair prize judgment process (step S902), it is determined that a stop command has already been issued to the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R (step S903: YES), and it is for 0 sheet combination avoidance The process is executed (step S904). In the present slot machine 10, the “0-sheet combination” is not the combination selected in the lottery process (FIG. 10), but the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped in a situation where the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is set. The symbol combination (so-called reach eye) for clearly showing that any BB winning data is set instead if BB winnings corresponding to the winning combination can not be established due to the relationship with the timing It refers to the stop mode to be displayed. If it corresponds to the establishment of the 0-sheet combination, only the unfair prize judgment bit of the judgment information buffer B corresponding to the current target symbol number is cleared to "0". In this way, the priority information that causes the so-called reach to appear in a situation where BB winning data is not set is made smaller than the priority information that does not cause both the so-called reach at the time of the unfair prize and the BB non-win Can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the symbol number for causing so-called reach eyes to stop at the base position when BB is not won in the target reel, and to prevent occurrence of so-called reach eyes when BB is not won.

  If a negative determination is made in step S903, or if the process of step S904 is executed, the process of winning is executed on the condition that one of the winning combinations is won in the current game (step S905: YES). (Step S906). FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the winning process.

  First, a winning symbol formation determination process is executed (step S1001). In the winning symbol formation determining process, it is determined whether or not the symbol number specified as existing on the main line ML matches the winning combination of the lottery process (FIG. 10) in the current game. As a result of the winning symbol formation determination processing, when it is determined that a symbol is present on the main line ML so as to enable any re-game winning (step S1002: YES), determination information of the current symbol number “1” is set to the replay bit in the buffer B (step S1003). As described above, in the determination information buffer B in the slot machine 10, the sixth to third bits have functions as a replay bit and an acquired number bit, and the second bit is a replay bit and a feature bit. It has a function (see FIG. 21). Therefore, in step S1003, "1" is stored in the sixth bit to the second bit of the determination information buffer B.

  As a result of the winning symbol formation determination processing, when it is determined that a symbol is present on the main line ML so as to enable any BB winning (step S1004: YES), for the determination information of the current target symbol number "1" is set to the feature bit in the buffer B (step S1005). As described above, in the determination information buffer B in the slot machine 10, the second bit functions as a replay bit and a feature bit (see FIG. 21). Therefore, in step S1005, "1" is stored in the second bit of the determination information buffer B.

  As a result of the winning symbol formation determination process, when it is determined that the symbol is present on the main line ML so as to enable any of the small winning combination (step S1006: YES), the corresponding small winning combination is established The number of medals paid out is read out from the main ROM 73, and the read out number of medals is added to the acquired number area provided in the main RAM 74.

  Returning to the description of the winning determination process (FIG. 23), when the negative determination is made in step S905 or when the process of step S906 is executed, an acquired number setting process is performed (step S907). In the acquisition number setting process, the payout amount information stored in the acquisition number area of the main side RAM 74 is compared with the virtual payout upper limit information set in the offset designation table specified in the current game, and the payout number information is obtained. It is determined whether or not the virtual payout upper limit information is equal to or larger than the virtual payout upper limit information. If the payout number information is smaller than the virtual payout upper limit information, the payout number information is stored in the acquired number bits (sixth to third bits) of the determination information buffer B in the current target symbol number. If the payout number information is equal to or larger than the virtual payout upper limit information, the virtual payout upper limit information is set as the acquired number bit (sixth to third bits) of the determination information buffer B in the current target symbol number. Store.

  For example, in a game in which the index value IV = 1 in the non-BB state, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the virtual payout upper limit information is “9” which is the number of payouts at the bell winning. The virtual payout upper limit information is “1” which is the same as “1”, which is the payout number at the time of the first compensation winning, if the first stop is set to “15” which is a larger number than the first stop and the left reel 32L. It is set to. Thereby, when the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time, the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the bell winning is made larger than the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the first compensation winning. As a result, it becomes possible to set the priority determination value of the symbol for establishing the bell winning to a larger value than the symbol for finally establishing the first compensation winning. On the other hand, when the reels other than the left reel 32L are stopped for the first time, the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol for establishing the bell prize shall be the same as the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol for establishing the first compensation winning. Is possible. In this case, if the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time by setting the value of the pull-in bit described later, the priority determination value of the symbols for establishing the first compensation winning is larger than the symbol for establishing the bell winning. It becomes possible to

  In a game in which the index value IV = 2 is won in the non-BB state, the virtual payout upper limit information is “9” which is the number of payouts at the bell prize if the first stop is the middle reel 32M. The virtual payout upper limit information is set to “1” which is the same as “1”, which is the number of payouts at the time of the second compensation winning, if the first stop is other than the middle reel 32M. It is set. Thus, when the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the bell winning is set to a value larger than the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the second compensation winning. As a result, it is possible to set the priority determination value of the symbol for establishing the bell winning to a larger value than the symbol for finally establishing the second compensation winning. On the other hand, when the reels other than the middle reel 32M are stopped for the first time, the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol for establishing the bell prize and the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol for establishing the first complemented prize shall be the same. Is possible. In this case, by setting the value of the draw-in bit described later, when the other than the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, the priority determination value of the symbols for establishing the second compensation winning is larger than the symbol for establishing the bell winning. It becomes possible to

  In a game in which the index value IV = 3 is won in the non-BB state, the virtual payout upper limit information is “9” which is the number of payouts at the bell prize if the first stop is the right reel 32R. If the first stop is other than the right reel 32R, the virtual payout upper limit information is set to “1” which is the same as “1” which is the number of payouts at the time of the third compensation winning. It is set. Thereby, when the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the bell winning is set to a value larger than the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the third compensating winning. As a result, it is possible to set the priority determination value of the symbol for establishing the bell winning to a larger value than the symbol for finally establishing the third compensation winning. On the other hand, when the reels other than the right reel 32R are stopped for the first time, the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol for establishing the bell prize and the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol for establishing the third compensation prize may be the same. Is possible. In this case, by setting the value of the pull-in bit, which will be described later, when the first reel other than the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the priority determination value of symbols that establish the third compensation winning is larger It becomes possible to

  In a game in which the index value IV = 5 is won in the non-BB state, the virtual payout upper limit information is higher than the payout number “7” at the time of winning in the watermelon regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is set to "15" which is a large number. As a result, regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the value of the number-of-acquisitions bit of the symbol that establishes the watermelon winning is made larger than the value of the number of acquired sheets of the symbol that establishes the first compensation winning As a result, it is possible to set the priority determination value of the symbol for establishing the watermelon winning to a larger value than the symbol for finally establishing the first compensation winning.

  After the acquired sheet number setting process is performed in step S 907, a pull-in bit setting process is performed (step S 908). In the pull-in bit setting process, a process for setting a pull-in bit (first bit to 0th bit) of the determination information buffer B is executed using the pull-in bit table. As a result, in a situation where so-called dropping occurs, a situation in which none of the winning combinations are won, and a situation in which a plurality of types of winning data in which the same acquired sheet number has the same value are simultaneously set, etc. It is possible to set the stop mode to a larger value in the priority information than the other stop modes.

<Reel stop processing>
Next, the reel stop processing executed in step S308 of the normal processing (FIG. 9) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1101, it is determined whether any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated and a stop command for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is generated. If a stop command is not generated, a stop command is generated. Wait up to. If a stop command has been issued, a slip number acquisition process is executed (step S1102). FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the slip number acquisition process.

  In the slip number acquisition process, first, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop command are specified (step S1201). Then, the arrival symbol number of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped when the stop command is received is acquired (step S1202). The arrival symbol number is the symbol number of the symbol reaching the base position (actually, the lower part) when the stop command is received for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. Further, “0” is stored in the slip number counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1203).

  Thereafter, the determination symbol number is acquired by adding the value of the slip number counter to the arrival symbol number (step S1204). When the value of the slip number counter is “0”, the judgment symbol number = the arrival symbol number. Also, the determination information buffer B corresponding to the determination symbol number is acquired (step S1205). Then, the priority determination value of the acquired determination information buffer B is calculated (step S1206). The priority order judgment value is a judgment value calculated by arranging each bit of the judgment information buffer B from the upper side and converting a numerical value assumed as an 8-digit binary number into an octal number, “0 to 8”. Is represented by an octal number (0 is the smallest and 8 is the largest). Therefore, the priority determination value increases as “1” is stored in the upper bits.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the priority determination value calculated in step S1206 is larger than the priority determination value calculated last time (step S1207). If the current time is larger, the current value of the sliding number counter is stored in the buffer for setting sliding number provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1208).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1207, or if the process of step S1208 is executed, the slip number counter is incremented by 1 (step S1209). Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the slip number counter is "5" (step S1210). If the value of the slip number counter is not "5", the process returns to step S1204.

  That is, in the slip number acquisition process, while calculating and comparing five priority determination values from the arrival symbol number to the symbol number four higher than the arrival symbol number, the highest priority determination value among them is calculated. Specify the slip number so that the symbol of the symbol number with a large symbol number becomes the stop symbol of the base point position. Here, the reason why the priority determination value up to the symbol number four symbols above that of the reaching symbol number is calculated from the reaching symbol number is to make it possible to slide up to four symbols. As a result, it becomes possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of so-called "drop-out" in which the symbol or the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination and the symbol winning does not stop on the effective line, and the winning symbol is not It is possible to avoid the problem that the combination of C and C stops on the effective line.

  Returning to the description of the reel stop process (FIG. 25), after the slip number acquisition process is executed in step S1102, the stop position setting process is executed (step S1103). In the stop position setting process, the slip number is acquired by referring to the setting slip number buffer. Then, a stop symbol number is calculated by adding the slip number to the reach symbol number, and the calculated stop symbol number information is stored as a stop position information in the stop position buffer provided in the main RAM 74. .

  Thereafter, the stop interrupt process is permitted (step S1104). The stop interrupt process is executed in the stepping motor control process of step S206 in the above-described timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). In the stop interrupt process, it is determined whether or not the symbol of the stop symbol number set in the previous stop position setting process has reached the base position, and if the symbol has reached, the deceleration process is started Then, the symbol is stopped at the base position. Since the stop interrupt process is executed as part of the timer interrupt process, the stop interrupt process is executed a plurality of times until the symbol is stopped at the base position.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current stop command is for stopping the last reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the current stop command is the first stop command or the next stop command, priority information creation processing is executed (step S1106). The processing content of the priority order information creation processing is as described above (see FIG. 22).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1105, or after the process of step S1106 is performed, it is determined whether or not the stopping of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop instruction has been completed (step S1107) . If not completed, the process waits in step S1107. If it is completed, the stop interrupt process is inhibited (step S1108).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R has stopped (step S1109). If the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not stopped, the process returns to step S1101. If the rotation is stopped, the payout determination process is executed (step S1110). In the payout determination process, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the main line ML. Then, if any of the replay wins is established, the replay bonus is awarded, and if any of the wins corresponding to the grant of the game medium is established, the prize is dealt. A setting is made to give a number of game media.

<Correspondence processing at the end of the game>
Next, the processing at the end of the game, which is executed in step S310 of the normal processing (FIG. 9), will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the response processing at the end of the game, when any BB winning data is set or in the BB state (step S1301: YES), processing for BB is executed (step S1302). In the processing for BB, if any BB winning data is set, it is determined whether BB winning has occurred in the current game, and if BB winning has occurred, the main RAM 74 is selected. The gaming state is shifted to the BB state by setting “1” to the provided BB state flag. Thus, in the lottery process (FIG. 10) in the next and subsequent games, the BB lottery table (FIG. 17) is referred to. Further, by transmitting a command indicating transition to the BB state to the effect side MPU 82, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 start the effect for the BB state. The BB winning data is deleted from the main side RAM 74 when shifting to the BB state, thereby releasing the BB winning state.

  When in the BB state, the BB state processing is executed as the BB processing. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the BB state process. If the game is won with the index value IV = 2 or 4 in the BB lottery table (FIG. 17) in the current game (step S1401: YES), the advantageous lottery process is executed (step S1402). As described above, only watermelon winning data is set as index value IV = 2 in the lottery table for BB, and only cherry winning data is set as index value IV = 4 as described above. Even if the index value IV = 2 is won, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the watermelon winning may not be established, and even if the index value IV = 4 it is elected each stop button 42 Depending on the operation timing of 44, there is a possibility that the cherry winning is not established, but even if the corresponding winning is not established, the advantageous lottery process is executed if the index value IV = 2 or 4 is won. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the advantageous lottery process may be executed on the condition that the corresponding winning is established.

  In the advantageous lottery process, the advantageous lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 2 and 4 is read from the main ROM 73, and the value of the lottery counter periodically updated (for example, 2 msec cycle) is read in the main RAM 74, The value of the lottery counter is checked against the read advantage lottery table. In the advantageous lottery table, when the index value IV = 2 is won, the advantageous winning is achieved with a probability of 1/2, and when the index value IV = 4 is won, the advantageous winning is achieved with a probability of 4/5. Become.

  The advantageous lottery table is provided as a common type of table for the set values “1” to “6” of the slot machine 10. That is, the probability of becoming an advantageous winning when the index value IV = 2 is won in the BB state is common to all settings, and the probability of being an advantageous winning when the index value IV = 4 is elected in the BB state Is common to all settings. Further, the probability of winning with index value IV = 2 in the BB state is common to all settings, and the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in BB state is also common to all settings. Therefore, the probability of winning in the BB state is common to all settings. This makes it possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage between settings with respect to the probability of winning in the BB state. Also, since it is sufficient to store only one type of table common to all settings for each of index values IV = 2 and 4 as the advantageous lottery table, storage for storing the advantageous lottery table in advance It is possible to reduce the capacity.

  If it is determined in the advantageous lottery process that an advantageous prize is won (step S1403: YES), it is determined whether the value of the AT state counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1404). The AT state counter is a counter for specifying whether or not the main MPU 72 is in the AT state and, in the case of the AT state, for specifying the staying mode of the AT state. In the non-AT state, the value of the AT state counter is "0", and in the AT state, the value of the AT state counter is 1 or more.

  If the value of the AT state counter is "0" (step S1404: NO), "1" is set in the during BB transition win flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1405). The BB transition winning flag specifies by the main side MPU 72 that it is necessary to shift to the AT state after the end of the BB state, triggered by the fact that the advantageous win is achieved in the BB state shifted in the non-AT state. Is a flag to In other words, when an advantageous winning is made in the advantageous lottery process in the BB state shifted in the non-AT state, the state shifts to the AT state after the end of the BB state.

  If the value of the AT state counter is 1 or more (step S1404: YES), "50" is added as the number of added games to the ART game number counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1406). The ART game number counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of continuing games in one execution of the ART state. That is, in the case of an advantageous winning in the advantageous lottery process in the BB state shifted in the AT state, the number of continued games in one execution of the ART state increases.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401, a negative determination is made in step S1403, a process of step S1405 is performed, or a process of step S1406 is performed, a game medium is applied in the current game. On the condition (step S1407: YES), the subtraction process of the BB counter provided in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S1408). The BB counter is a counter for specifying by the main MPU 72 whether or not the total number of game media provided since the start of the BB state has reached the end reference number. When the BB state is started, "350" which is the termination reference number is set in the BB counter. In the subtraction process of the BB counter, the number of game media provided in the current game is subtracted from the value of the BB counter.

  If the value of the BB counter after subtraction is “0” (step S1409: YES), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the during BB transition win flag of the main side RAM 74 to determine the current time It is determined whether AT transition winning has occurred in the BB state (step S1410). When “1” is set in the BB during transition winning flag, after the BB during transition winning flag is cleared to “0”, the processing for setting the number of initially continuing games is executed (step S1411) and the main RAM 74 is "1" is set to the provided AT state counter (step S1412). In the setting process of the initial continuation game number, “50” is set as the initial continuation game number in the ART game number counter provided in the main RAM 74.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1410, or if the process of step S1412 is performed, a BB termination process is performed (step S1413). In the BB end process, the BB state is ended by clearing the BB state flag of the main RAM 74 to "0". In addition, by transmitting a command indicating that the BB state has ended to the effect side MPU 82, the effect for the BB state in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 is ended. When the BB state ends, the lottery mode is the normal mode even if the lottery mode before the start of the BB state is any mode. Further, when the BB state is started in the AT state, ART preparation state processing (step S1308) described later is executed after the BB state ends regardless of the state before the start of the BB state.

  Returning to the explanation of the response processing at the end of the game (FIG. 27), there is neither BB winning state nor BB state (step S1301: NO), and if not AT state (step S1303: NO), transition to RT mode The processing (step S1304), the number-of-games cancellation management processing (step S1305) and the transition chance management processing (step S1306) are executed. Even if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped in the game in the state of neither BB state nor AT state, no penalty is imposed to limit the provision of profits in the subsequent games.

  In the RT mode transition process (step S1304), when it is specified that the first RT replay winning has occurred in the current game, the first RT mode is entered, and the second RT replay winning occurs in the current game. If it is determined that there is a switch to the second RT mode. In addition, in the transition process of the RT mode, when it is specified that the second fall replay winning combination has occurred in the current game, the transition to the first RT mode is made, and the first fall replay winning combination occurs in the current game. If it is determined that there is a change to the normal mode.

  In the game number cancellation management process (step S1305), transition to the AT state is made when the game for the cancellation game number set when the AT state ends last time is digested without the occurrence of a new transition to the AT state Execute the process to That is, every time one game is completed, the value of the number of canceled games is decremented by one, and when the value of the remaining number of canceled games becomes "0", the AT status counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". . As a result, the ART preparation state process (step S1308) to be described later is executed in the next processing cycle in the handling process at the end of the game.

  The transition chance management process (step S1306) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. If the player wins with the index value IV = 4 or 6 in the non-BB state in the current game (step S1501: YES), a transition lottery process to the AT state is executed (step S1502). Only watermelon winning data is set to index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state as described above, and only cherry winning data is set to index value IV = 6 as described above. Even if the index value IV = 4 is won, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the watermelon winning may not be established, and even if the index value IV = 6 is won, each stop button 42 ~ Depending on the operation timing of 44, there is a possibility that cherry winning is not established, but if index value IV = 4 or 6 is won even if the corresponding winning is not established, the transition lottery process to AT state is executed Be done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured that the transition lottery process to the AT state is executed on condition that the corresponding winning is established.

  Here, as described above, in the BB state, the advantageous lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 2 or 4 is won, but the index value IV = 2 in the BB state is not the BB state. Only watermelon winning data is set in the same manner as the index value IV = 4 in, and only cherry winning data is set to the index value IV = 4 in the BB state as in the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state. . That is, the winning combination serving as the execution trigger for the advantageous lottery process in the BB state and the winning combination serving as the execution trigger for the transition lottery process in the AT state in the non-BB state are common. As a result, the winning combination serving as an opportunity for execution of the advantageous lottery process and the transition lottery process to the AT state becomes clear to the player.

  In the transition lottery process to the AT state, the non-BB AT transition lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 and 6 is read from the main ROM 73 and updated periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) in the main RAM 74 The value of the lottery counter is read out, and the value of the lottery counter is compared with the read out non-BB AT transition lottery table. In the non-BB AT transition lottery table, when it is elected with index value IV = 4, it becomes AT transition winning with a probability of 1/2, and it is 4/5 when it is elected with index value IV = 6. It will win the AT transition with a probability of

  The non-BB AT transition lottery table is provided as one type of table common to “1” to “6” of the setting value of the slot machine 10. That is, the probability that the AT transition is won when the index value IV = 4 is won in the non-BB state is common to all settings, and the AT transition when the index value IV = 6 is won in the non-BB state The probability of winning is also common to all settings. The probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is common to all settings, and the probability of winning with index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is also common to all settings. Therefore, the probability of winning the AT transition in the non-BB state is common to all settings. This makes it possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage between settings with respect to the probability of winning an AT transition in the non-BB state. Also, since it is sufficient to store only one type of table common to all settings for each of index values IV = 4 and 6 as an AT transition lottery table during non-BB, AT during non-BB It is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the transition lottery table in advance.

  The probability of winning with index value IV = 2 in which only watermelon winning data is set in the BB state is the same as the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in which only watermelon winning data is set in the non-BB state. In addition, the probability of winning in the advantageous lottery process triggered by winning in the index value IV = 2 in the BB state, and triggered by winning in the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state The probability of becoming a transition winning in the transition lottery process of the AT state is the same. Therefore, the probability of being won with an index value IV in which only watermelon winning data is set and being provided with a benefit different from the provision of gaming media is the same in the BB state and the non-BB state.

  The probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 in which only cherry winning data is set in the BB state is the same as the probability of winning with an index value IV = 6 in which only cherry winning data is set in the non-BB state. In addition, the probability of winning in the advantageous lottery process triggered by winning in the index value IV = 4 in the BB state, and triggered by winning in the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state The probability of becoming a transition winning in the transition lottery process of the AT state is the same. Therefore, the probability of being won by the index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set and being provided with a benefit different from the grant of the game medium is the same in the BB state and the non-BB state.

  Furthermore, the winning combinations that trigger the execution of the advantageous lottery process in the BB state are the index values IV = 2 and 4 as already described, and the winning combinations that trigger the execution of the transition lottery process in the AT state in the non-BB state are already Index values IV = 4 and 6 as described. Then, as described above, the probability of being won by the index value IV in which only the watermelon winning data is set, and the benefit different from the awarding of the game medium being given is the same in the BB state and the non-BB state The probability of being won with an index value IV in which only data is set and being provided with a benefit different from the provision of gaming media is the same in the BB state and the non-BB state. Therefore, the probability that a benefit different from the provision of the game medium is given when the small winning combination corresponding to the provision of the game medium is won is the same in the BB state and the non-BB state.

  When the AT transition is won in the transition lottery to AT state (step S1503: YES), the setting process of the initial continuation game number is executed (step S1504), and the AT state counter of the main side RAM 74 is "1". Is set (step S1505). In the setting process of the initial continuation game number, “50” is set as the initial continuation game number in the ART game number counter provided in the main RAM 74 as in step S1411 in the BB state process (FIG. 28). Further, by setting "1" in the AT state counter, ART preparation state processing (step S1308) described later is executed at the next processing cycle in the processing corresponding to the end of the game.

  Returning to the explanation of the response processing at the end of the game (FIG. 27), if the value of the AT state counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, it means that it is the AT state, so an affirmative determination is made in step S1303. The process proceeds to step S1307. In step S1307, the value of the AT state counter is grasped, and processing corresponding to the grasped value is executed. Specifically, if the value of the AT state counter is “1”, ART preparation state processing is executed (step S1308), and if the value of the AT state counter is “2”, ART state processing is executed (step S1309) If the value of the AT state counter is “3”, ART end branch processing is executed (step S1310). When the process of step S1302 is executed, the process of step S1306 is executed, or the process of any of steps S1308 to S1310 is executed, the game end command is set as the transmission target to the effect side MPU 82 (step S1311). The game end command is a command for causing the effect MPU 82 to recognize that one game is ended, and the command is transmitted to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). Ru. Hereinafter, each process of step S1308 to step S1310 will be described.

  First, the ART preparation state process (step S1308) will be described. The ART preparation state is a state in which, when a transition possible condition to the ART state is established, the state is to stay before transitioning to the ART state. In the ART preparation state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for notifying the formation of the bell winning when the index value IV = 1 to 3 is won is notified. Further, in the ART preparation state, it is determined that the player is elected in any of the index values IV = 9 to 12 (hereinafter referred to as a promotion target role) in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) or the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 13) When it becomes, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the first RT replay win or the second RT replay win (hereinafter, also referred to as a halt order for promotion occurrence) is informed. The transition to the ART state is made in the first RT mode and won in the promotion target role in a situation where ART preparation state processing or ART end branch processing is being executed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order for promotion occurrence. This occurs when the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing ART preparation state processing. In the ART preparation state process, when the index value IV = 4 or 6 in the non-BB state is won in the current game (step S1601: YES), the additional lottery process is executed (step S1602). Only watermelon winning data is set to index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state as described above, and only cherry winning data is set to index value IV = 6 as described above. Even if the index value IV = 4 is won, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the watermelon winning may not be established, and even if the index value IV = 6 is won, each stop button 42 ~ Depending on the operation timing of 44, there is a possibility that the cherry winning is not established, but even if the corresponding winning is not established, the additional lottery processing is executed if the index value IV = 4 or 6 has been won. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the additional lottery process may be executed on the condition that the corresponding winning is established.

  Here, as described above, when the player is elected in the non-BB state and the index value IV = 4 or 6 in the non-AT state, the transition lottery process to the AT state is executed. Further, as described above, in the BB state, the advantageous lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 2 or 4 results in winning, but the index value IV = 2 in the BB state is in the non-BB state. Similar to the index value IV = 4, only watermelon winning data is set, and only the cherry winning data is set to the index value IV = 4 in the BB state, similarly to the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state. In other words, the winning combination that triggers the execution of the advantageous lottery process in the BB state, the winning combination that triggers the execution of the transition lottery process in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, and the non-BB state and the AT state In the above, it is common to the winning combination that triggers the execution of the additional lottery process. As a result, the winning combination serving as an opportunity for execution of the advantageous lottery process, the transition lottery process of the AT state, and the additional lottery process becomes clear to the player.

  In the additional lottery process, the additional lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 and 6 is read from the main ROM 73, and the value of the lottery counter periodically (eg, 2 msec cycle) is read in the main RAM 74, The value of the lottery counter is compared against the read-out additional lottery table. The added lottery table is elected with a probability of 1/2 if it is elected with index value IV = 4, and is elected with a probability of 4/5 when it is elected with index value IV = 6. Become.

  The additional lottery table is provided as a common type of table for the set values “1” to “6” of the slot machine 10. That is, the probability of becoming an additional winning when the index value IV = 4 is won in the non-BB state is common to all settings, and when the index value IV = 6 is won in the non-BB state, Is also common to all settings. The probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is common to all settings, and the probability of winning with index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is also common to all settings. Therefore, the probability of winning in the non-BB state is common to all settings. This makes it possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage between settings with respect to the probability of winning in the non-BB state. Also, since it is sufficient to store only one kind of table common to all settings for each of index values IV = 4 and 6 as the additional lottery table, storage for storing the additional lottery table in advance It is possible to reduce the capacity.

  If the addition lottery is achieved in the addition lottery process (step S1603: YES), "50" is added as the number of addition games to the ART game number counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S1604). As a result, the number of continued games in one execution of the ART state after transitioning to the ART state is increased.

  In the ART preparation state process, when it is specified that the second RT replay winning has occurred in the current game (step S1605: YES), "2" is set in the AT state counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1606). As a result, the main MPU 72 executes ART state processing (step S1309) at the next processing cycle in the game end processing (FIG. 27), and the gaming state shifts from the ART preparation state to the ART state. Further, data setting of the main side RAM 74 is performed so that the lottery mode becomes the second RT mode (step S1607). Thereafter, under the condition that the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 is “0” (step S1608: YES), the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 is incremented by 20 (step S1609). As a result, when transitioning to the BB state at the timing when the number of remaining games in the ART state becomes “0”, the BB state ends even if the addition to the ART game number counter does not occur in the BB state. It will be possible to ensure that the ART state is executed to a certain extent later.

  In the ART preparation state process, another RT mode transition process is executed (step S1610). In the other RT mode transition processing, when it is identified that the first RT replay winning has occurred, the first RT mode is entered, and when it is identified that the first falling replay occurrence is identified, the ordinary RT mode is entered When it is specified that the second fall repurchase winning has occurred, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode.

  Next, the ART state process (step S1309) in the game end process (FIG. 27) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the ART state process, when the index value IV = 4 or 6 in the non-BB state is won in the current game (step S1701: YES), the additional lottery process is executed (step S1702). Only watermelon winning data is set to index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state as described above, and only cherry winning data is set to index value IV = 6 as described above. Even if the index value IV = 4 is won, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the watermelon winning may not be established, and even if the index value IV = 6 is won, each stop button 42 ~ Depending on the operation timing of 44, there is a possibility that the cherry winning is not established, but even if the corresponding winning is not established, the additional lottery processing is executed if the index value IV = 4 or 6 has been won. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the additional lottery process may be executed on the condition that the corresponding winning is established.

  Here, the additional lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 4 or 6 is won in the ART preparation state as described above. Further, as described above, when the player is elected in the non-BB state and the index value IV = 4 or 6 in the non-AT state, the transition lottery process to the AT state is executed. Further, as described above, in the BB state, the advantageous lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 2 or 4 results in winning, but the index value IV = 2 in the BB state is in the non-BB state. Similar to the index value IV = 4, only watermelon winning data is set, and only the cherry winning data is set to the index value IV = 4 in the BB state, similarly to the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state. In other words, the winning combination that triggers the execution of the advantageous lottery process in the BB state, the winning combination that triggers the execution of the transition lottery process in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, and the non-BB state and the AT state In the above, it is common to the winning combination that triggers the execution of the additional lottery process. As a result, the winning combination serving as an opportunity for execution of the advantageous lottery process, the transition lottery process of the AT state, and the additional lottery process becomes clear to the player.

  In the additional lottery process, the additional lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 and 6 is read from the main ROM 73, and the value of the lottery counter periodically (eg, 2 msec cycle) is read in the main RAM 74, The value of the lottery counter is compared against the read-out additional lottery table. The added lottery table is elected with a probability of 1/2 if it is elected with index value IV = 4, and is elected with a probability of 4/5 when it is elected with index value IV = 6. Become.

  The additional lottery table is provided as a common type of table for the set values “1” to “6” of the slot machine 10. That is, the probability of becoming an additional winning when the index value IV = 4 is won in the non-BB state is common to all settings, and when the index value IV = 6 is won in the non-BB state, Is also common to all settings. The probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is common to all settings, and the probability of winning with index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is also common to all settings. Therefore, the probability of winning in the non-BB state is common to all settings. This makes it possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage between settings with respect to the probability of winning in the non-BB state. Also, since it is sufficient to store only one kind of table common to all settings for each of index values IV = 4 and 6 as the additional lottery table, storage for storing the additional lottery table in advance It is possible to reduce the capacity.

  The additional lottery table to be read out at step S1702 is the same as the additional lottery table to be read at step S1602 of the ART preparation process (FIG. 30). Also, the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in non-BB state and non-AT state, and winning with index value IV = 4 in non-BB state and AT state (ART preparation state, ART state) The probability is the same as in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, and the probability of becoming a transition winning in the transition lottery process of the AT state triggered by being elected with the index value IV = 4 and the non-BB state That is, the probability of winning in the additional drawing process with the winning with the index value IV = 4 in the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state) is the same. Therefore, in the non-BB state, the probability that an index value IV = 4 is won and a profit different from the provision of gaming media is given is the same in the non-AT state and the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state).

  The additional lottery table to be read out at step S1702 is the same as the additional lottery table to be read at step S1602 of the ART preparation process (FIG. 30). Further, the probability of winning with index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state and non-AT state, and winning with index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state and AT state (ART preparation state, ART state) The probability is the same as in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, and the probability of becoming a transition win in the transition lottery process of the AT state triggered by being elected with the index value IV = 6, and the non-BB state That is, the probability of winning in the addition lottery process with the winning with the index value IV = 6 in the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state) is the same. Therefore, in the non-BB state, the probability of winning with index value IV = 6 and being provided with a benefit different from the provision of gaming media is the same in the non-AT state and the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state).

  Furthermore, in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state, the winning combinations that trigger the execution of the transition lottery process of the AT state are index values IV = 4 and 6 as already described, and the non-BB state is the AT state ( The winning combinations that trigger execution of the additional lottery process in the ART preparation state and ART state) have index values IV = 4 and 6 as already described. Then, as described above, the probability that the index value IV = 4 will be won and the profit different from the provision of the game medium is given is the same in the non-AT state and the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state) The probability of winning with a value IV = 6 and being provided with a benefit different from that for the provision of gaming media is the same for the non-AT state and the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state). Therefore, the probability that a profit different from the provision of the game medium is given with the opportunity of winning the small part corresponding to the provision of the game medium is the same in the non-AT state and the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state) is there.

  The probability of winning with index value IV = 2 in which only watermelon winning data is set in the BB state, and the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in which only watermelon winning data is set in the non-BB state The probability of being elected in an advantageous lottery process triggered by winning with index value IV = 2 in the BB state as well as in the non-BB state with index value IV = 4 in the non-AT state In the transition lottery process in the AT state triggered by winning, the probability of transition win in the transition lottery process and the non-BB state, the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state) was elected with index value IV = 4 The probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process triggered by the event is the same. Therefore, the probability of winning with index value IV in which only watermelon winning data is set and gaining a benefit different from the provision of gaming media is BB status, non BB status, non AT status and , Non-BB state and AT state (ART preparation state, ART state).

  The probability of winning with index value IV = 4, in which only cherry winning data is set in the BB state, and the probability of winning in index value IV = 6, in which only cherry winning data is set in the non-BB state The probability of being elected in an advantageous lottery process triggered by winning with index value IV = 4 in the BB state as well as in the BB state, and with index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state In the transition lottery process of AT state triggered by winning, the probability of being transitioned to win in transition lottery process and non BB state, it was elected with index value IV = 6 in AT state (ART preparation state, ART state) The probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process triggered by the event is the same. Therefore, the probability of winning with an index value IV in which only cherry winning data is set and gaining a benefit different from the grant of gaming media is a BB state, a non BB state and a non AT state , Non-BB state and AT state (ART preparation state, ART state).

  Furthermore, the winning combinations that trigger the execution of the advantageous lottery process in the BB state are the index values IV = 2 and 4 as already described, and are the execution triggers of the transition lottery process in the AT state in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state. As described above, the winning combinations are index values IV = 4 and 6 as described above, and the winning combinations serving as triggers for execution of the additional drawing process in the non-BB state and the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state) have already been described. And index values IV = 4 and 6. Then, as described above, the probability of winning with index value IV in which only watermelon winning data is set and gaining a benefit different from the grant of gaming media is BB state, non BB state, non AT state It is the same in a certain state and in a non-BB state and an AT state (ART preparation state, ART state), and it is elected with the index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set, and the game medium is awarded. The probability of being given a different benefit from is in the BB state, in the non BB state and in the non AT state, and in the non BB state and in the AT state (ART ready state, ART state) It is the same. Therefore, the probability that a benefit different from the provision of game media will be awarded when a small winning combination corresponding to the provision of game media is won is BB status, non BB status, non AT status and , Non-BB state and AT state (ART preparation state, ART state).

  If the addition lottery is achieved in the addition lottery process (step S1703: YES), "50" is added as the number of addition games to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1704). As a result, the number of continued games in one execution of the ART state is increased.

  In the ART state process, the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S1705). Then, if the value of the ART game number counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S1706: YES), it is determined whether or not the normal mode is set (step S1707). If the mode is not the normal mode (step S1707: NO), "3" is set in the AT state counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1708). As a result, the main MPU 72 executes ART termination branch processing (step S1310) in the next processing cycle in the response processing at the game end (FIG. 27), and the gaming state shifts from ART state to ART end branch state . On the other hand, when it is the normal mode (step S1707: YES), the AT state counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1709). This will end the AT state.

  In the ART state process, a transition process of the RT mode is executed (step S1710). In the transition process of the RT mode, when it is identified that the first RT replay winning has occurred, the first RT mode is entered, and when it is identified that the second RT replay winning is identified, the second RT mode is entered. When it is determined that the first fall re-play prize has occurred, the mode is shifted to the normal mode, and when it is specified that the second fall re-play prize has occurred, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode.

  Next, the ART end branch process (step S1310) in the game end process (FIG. 27) will be described.

  The ART end branch state is a gaming state in which the player stays when one execution cycle of the ART state ends. In the ART end branch state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for making it possible to establish the bell winning when the winning is made by any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is informed. On the other hand, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding the occurrence of the fall replay prize even if the player is elected as a player who enables the occurrence of the first fall replay prize or the second fall replay prize in ART termination branch state. Will not be reported. Then, when the first fall replay prize is generated and the mode is shifted to the normal mode in the ART end branch state, the value of the AT state counter is cleared to "0". This will end the AT state.

  Here, even if it is in the ART end branch state, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped to enable the establishment of the bell winning when the index value IV = 1 to 6 is won as described above. Since the order is notified, it is advantageous for the player. In this case, at least the lottery mode is shifted from the second RT mode to the first RT mode, and therefore, the ART end branch state is maintained. On the other hand, even if the player is elected to be able to generate any of the fall replay prizes in the ART end branch state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding the occurrence of the fall replay play is not notified. As a result, in the ART end branch state, if the player's prediction is made to hit and the occurrence of the fall fall replay is avoided, the ART end branch state can be continued. Therefore, it is possible to continue the ART termination branching state advantageous to the player by the player's own prediction, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Relationship between profit grant mode and set value>
Next, the relationship between the grant mode of benefits and the set value will be described. First, the relationship between the transition probability to the AT state in the non-BB state and the setting value will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As described above, in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state, the transition lottery process to the AT state is executed when the index value IV = 4 or 6 is won. In this case, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 in the lottery process of the winning combination in the non-BB state (FIG. 10) is any one of “1” to “6” for the setting value of the slot machine 10 Is also "655". That is, the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is common to all settings. Then, the probability of being won with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state and being transition win in the transition lottery process to the executed AT state is 1/2 of all settings in common. Further, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 6 in the lottery process (FIG. 10) of the winning combination in the non-BB state does not matter whether the setting value of the slot machine 10 is any of “1” to “6”. It is "155". That is, the probability of winning with the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is common to all settings. And in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state, the probability that the index value IV = 6 is won and the transition lottery to the AT state executed is a transition winning probability is 4/5 common to all settings. With the above configuration, the probability of occurrence of transition to the AT state in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state is common to all settings. This makes it possible to ensure that there is no advantage or disadvantage between settings with regard to the probability of a transition to an AT state in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state.

  Only watermelon winning data is set to index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state as described above, and as described above, index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is the watermelon winning data and the first supplemental winning data Is set. That is, the watermelon winning data is set to both the index value IV = 4 and 5 in the non-BB state. In addition, in the non-BB state, when the index value IV = 5 is won, establishment of the watermelon winning is prioritized over establishment of the first compensation winning. Therefore, in the non-BB state, when one of index values IV = 4 and 5 is won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning may stop on main line ML. On the other hand, index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state triggers execution of the transition lottery process to the AT state as already described, while the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state transitions to the AT state lottery process It does not become an execution opportunity of

  In such a configuration, the probability of winning with the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is different among the setting values of “1” to “6”. Specifically, when the set value is “1”, the point value PV of the index value IV = 5 is set to “900”, and when the set value is “2”, the index value IV = 5 When the point value PV is set to "800" and the set value is "3", the point value PV of the index value IV = 5 is set to "655" and the set value is "4" The point value PV of index value IV = 5 is set to “300”, and the point value PV of index value IV = 5 is set to “150” when the setting value is “5”. When the setting value is “6”, the point value PV of the index value IV = 5 is set to “50”. As a result, the larger the setting value, the lower the probability that the index value IV = 5 is won in the non-BB state. On the other hand, as described above, the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is common to all settings, and the transition lottery process to the AT state triggered by winning with index value IV = 4 The probability of winning transition is also common to all settings. Then, when watermelon winning data is set in the lottery process (FIG. 10) in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, the probability that the transition to the AT state will be won increases as the setting value increases. The lower the setting value, the lower the value.

  Also, when watermelon winning data is set, if so-called dropping does not occur or if so-called dropping occurs with a certain probability, a symbol corresponding to watermelon winning on the main line ML in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state. The probability of being won in the transition to the AT state when the combination stops is higher as the set value is larger and lower as the set value is smaller. Thus, as described above, in the configuration in which there is no advantage or disadvantage between the settings with respect to the probability of transition to the AT state in the non-AT state and the non-BB state, the non-BB state is The player can predict the set value by grasping the probability that the transition to the AT state will occur when the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning is stopped on the main line ML in the non-AT state. Therefore, in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the stop of the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning on the main line ML, thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible. Incidentally, in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state, the probability that the watermelon winning is achieved is lower as the setting value is larger and as the setting value is smaller.

  Not only watermelon winning data but also first compensation winning data is set to the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state. Then, when the index value IV = 5 is won in the non-BB state, even if it is not possible to cause the watermelon prize to occur at the timing when the stop button 42 to 44 is operated, the first compensation prize is When it is a timing that can be generated, the first compensation winning occurs. Thereby, even if it is not possible to generate a watermelon winning when the index value IV = 5 is won in the non-BB state, it is added by measuring the number of occurrences of the first compensation winning. Setting values can be predicted.

  In the non-BB state, when winning with index value IV = 5, the watermelon winning is prioritized, and then the first compensating winning is prioritized, but depending on the operation timing of the stop button 42 to 44, any winning is achieved There is nothing to do. As a result, it becomes possible to increase to some extent the degree of difficulty in predicting the set value by measuring the winning with index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state.

  Next, the relationship between the addition probability of the number of continued games in the AT state and the setting value will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. 32 (b).

  As described above, in the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state), the additional lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 4 or 6 is selected. In this case, as described above, the probability of winning with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is common to all settings. Further, the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the AT state and being won with additional lottery processing executed is also 1/2 of all the settings common. Further, as described above, the probability of winning with the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is common to all settings. Further, the probability of winning with the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state and being an additional winning in the executed lottery process is also 4/5 common to all settings. With the above configuration, the probability that the number of continued games is increased in the AT state is common to all settings. This makes it possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage between settings with respect to the probability that an increase in the number of continued games will occur in the AT state.

  Further, the number of continued games to be added when the additional winning is made in the additional lottery process is fixed at “50” regardless of which setting value. As a result, the number of games expected as an occurrence of the addition in the AT state is common to all settings, and it is possible to prevent the setting from having advantages or disadvantages in the number of games expected as the occurrence of the addition in the AT state. It becomes.

  As described above, the watermelon winning data is set to both the index value IV = 4 and 5 in the non-BB state. In addition, in the non-BB state, when the index value IV = 5 is won, establishment of the watermelon winning is prioritized over establishment of the first compensation winning. Therefore, in the non-BB state, when one of index values IV = 4 and 5 is won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning may stop on main line ML. On the other hand, index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state triggers execution of the additional lottery process as described above, while index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state does not trigger execution of the additional lottery process.

  As already described in such a configuration, the probability of winning with the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is different among the setting values “1” to “6”, and the larger the setting value is The probability of winning with index value IV = 5 in the BB state is low. On the other hand, as already explained, the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is common to all settings and added winning is won in the additional lottery processing triggered by the index value IV = 4 being won. The probability of becoming is also common to all settings. Then, when watermelon winning data is set in the lottery process (FIG. 10) of the winning combination in the AT state, the probability that the additional winning will be made becomes higher as the setting value becomes larger and becomes lower as the setting value becomes smaller. In addition, when so-called dropping does not occur when watermelon winning data is set, or if so-called dropping occurs with a certain probability, when the combination of symbols corresponding to watermelon winning is stopped on the main line ML in the AT state. The probability that the additional winning will be made is higher as the set value is larger, and lower as the set value is smaller. Thus, as described above, in the configuration in which there is no advantage or disadvantage between the settings with respect to the probability that the number of continued games will be added in the AT state, it corresponds to watermelon winning on the mainline ML in the AT state The player can predict the set value by grasping the probability that the continuation of the number of consecutive games will occur when the combination of the symbols is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the stop of the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning on the main line ML in the AT state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and the probability of winning with index value IV = 5 are the same for the AT state and the non-AT state, and are the non-BB state and the non-AT state. In the case of winning with index value IV = 4 in, the probability of transition winning in the transition lottery process to AT state and non-BB state, when winning with index value IV = 4 in AT state is added The probability of winning in the lottery process is the same. Thereby, when the set value is estimated, the number of times a profit other than the provision of the game medium is provided is AT state and not when the combination of symbols corresponding to watermelon winnings is stopped on the main line ML in the non-BB state. It becomes possible to measure without distinguishing in both of AT state. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large number of trials for estimating the setting value, and it is possible to improve the estimation accuracy of the setting value.

  Next, the relationship between the advantageous winning probability and the setting value in the BB state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As described above, in the BB state, the advantageous lottery process is executed when the index value IV is 2 or 4 and the winning is made. In this case, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 2 in the lottery process of the winning combination in the BB state (FIG. 10) is "Even if the setting value of the slot machine 10 is any of" 1 "to" 6 " It is 655 ". That is, the probability of winning with index value IV = 2 in the BB state is common to all settings. Further, the probability that the index value IV = 2 is won in the BB state and the advantageous winning process is executed in the advantageous lottery process is 1/2 of all the settings. Further, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 in the lottery process of the winning combination in the BB state (FIG. 10) is “Even if the setting value of the slot machine 10 is any of“ 1 ”to“ 6 ” It is 155 ". That is, the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the BB state is common to all settings. Further, the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the BB state and becoming an advantageous winning in the advantageous lottery process executed is also 4/5 common to all settings. With the above configuration, the probability of winning in the BB state is the same for all settings. This makes it possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage between settings with respect to the probability of winning in the BB state.

  Only watermelon winning data is set to index value IV = 2 in the BB state as described above, and watermelon winning data and first compensation winning data are set to index value IV = 3 in the BB state as described above It is done. That is, the watermelon winning data is set to both the index value IV = 2 and 3 in the BB state. When the player wins with the index value IV = 3 in the BB state, establishment of the watermelon winning is prioritized over establishment of the first compensation winning. Therefore, in the BB state, when one of index values IV = 2 and 3 is won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning can be stopped on the main line ML. On the other hand, index value IV = 2 in the BB state triggers execution of the advantageous lottery process as described above, while index value IV = 3 in the BB state does not trigger execution of the advantageous lottery process.

  In such a configuration, the probability of winning with index value IV = 3 in the BB state is different among the setting values “1” to “6”. Specifically, when the set value is “1”, the point value PV of the index value IV = 3 is set to “1000”, and when the set value is “2”, the index value IV = 3 When the point value PV is set to "1000" and the set value is "3", the point value PV with index value IV = 3 is set to "3000" and the set value is "4" The point value PV of index value IV = 3 is set to “3000” and the point value PV of index value IV = 3 is set to “5000” when the setting value is “5”. When the setting value is “6”, the point value PV of the index value IV = 3 is set to “5000”. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability that the index value IV = 3 will be won in the BB state. On the other hand, as described above, the probability of winning with index value IV = 2 in the BB state is common to all settings, and the winning process is based on the advantageous lottery process triggered by the winning with index value IV = 2. Is also common to all settings. As a result, the probability of being an advantageous winning when watermelon winning data is set in the lottery process (FIG. 10) of the winning combination in the BB state becomes lower as the setting value becomes larger and becomes higher as the setting value becomes smaller.

  Also, when watermelon winning data is set, if so-called dropping does not occur or if so-called dropping occurs with a certain probability, when a combination of symbols corresponding to watermelon winning is stopped on the main line ML in the BB state. The probability of winning an advantage is lower as the set value is larger and as the set value is smaller. Thereby, as described above, in the configuration in which there is no advantage or disadvantage between settings with respect to the probability of becoming an advantageous win in the BB state, a combination of symbols corresponding to watermelon winnings on the mainline ML in the BB state The player can predict the set value by grasping the probability of winning in an advantageous manner when the game is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the stop of the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning on the main line ML in the BB state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the non-BB state, when the combination of symbols corresponding to watermelon winnings is stopped on the main line ML, the probability that a benefit other than the grant of gaming media is awarded becomes higher as the setting value becomes larger, and the setting value The lower the value of, the lower the value, while in the BB state, when the combination of symbols corresponding to watermelon winnings is stopped on the main line ML, the probability that a benefit other than the provision of gaming media is given is the set value The larger the value is, the lower the setting value is. Thereby, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning on the main line ML is stopped, the relationship between the probability that a benefit other than the provision of gaming media is given and the setting value is reversed between the non-BB state and the BB state. It becomes possible to make a relationship. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the judgment index in estimating the setting value.

<Another form of the first embodiment>
Although the first compensation winning data is set to each of the index values IV = 1 and 5 in the non-BB state, the first compensation winning data may not be set to the index value IV = 1. In this case, since the first compensation winning data is set only to the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state, it is determined that the index value IV = 5 is won when the first compensation winning prize is established. It will be clear.

  The number of games to be added is not limited to one set when the number of continuous games in the ART state is added, and may be set to a plurality of types. Even in this case, it is possible to make the expected value of the number of games to be added common to all settings by making the selection rate of the number of additional games of each type common to all settings.

  -In the configuration in which there are a plurality of main lines ML, the watermelon symbol is obtained when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won and when the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is elected. The main lines ML in which the combination is established may be configured differently. In addition, in the case of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state or winning with index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state, one of the combinations of watermelon symbols is established in the main line ML, The combination of watermelon patterns may be established in the sublines SUL1 to SUL4. In addition, sublines SUL1 to SUL4 in which a combination of watermelon symbols is formed are different between the case of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and the case with index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state. It is also good. In these cases, it is possible to distinguish between the case in which the index value IV4 is won and the case in which the index value IV = 5.

  In the non-BB state, the probability of winning at index value IV = 5 is configured to be lower as the setting value is larger, but is not limited thereto, and the configuration is such that the winning probability increases as the setting value is larger It is also good. In this case, the larger the setting value, the lower the probability that a benefit other than the provision of the game medium corresponding to the watermelon winning is awarded when the watermelon winning is established.

  -A group having a large set value (for example, set values of "4", "5" and "6") is a group having a small set value (for example, set values of "1", "2" and "3") Instead, the probability of winning at index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state may be increased, or the probability of winning may be decreased. In addition, the group having an odd setting value may be configured to have a higher probability of winning with index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state than the group having an even setting value, and the configuration may be such that the winning probability is low. Good.

  -A configuration in which the tendency for the set value of the probability of winning at index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is true to the tendency for the set value of the probability of winning at index value IV = 3 in the BB state The configuration is not limited to the above and may be identical.

  The probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is not limited to the same configuration among the setting values of “1” to “6”, and the configuration is substantially the same as the different ones. It is also good. In addition, the probability that the transition winning or the additional winning will be made when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is limited to the same configuration among the setting values of “1” to “6”. Instead, different ones may be configured substantially the same. Also, any of these configurations may be applied to the index value IV = 2 in the BB state.

  The probability that the transition or additional winning in the non-BB state is not limited to the same configuration among the set values of “1” to “6”, and may be substantially the same as different configurations. The configuration may be significantly different. Further, the probability of becoming an advantageous winning in the BB state is not limited to the same configuration among the set values of “1” to “6”, and may be configured to be substantially the same as different ones. The configuration may be different.

  ・ The transition winning or winning is achieved when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is significantly different among the setting values of “1” to “6” but the index value IV = 4 and the probability of winning is the index value IV = 4 Since the probability of winning is adjusted to fill the difference, the probability that the index value IV = 4 will be won and the transition winning or the additional winning will be the same among the setting values of “1” to “6”. Alternatively, they may have substantially the same configuration. Also, if the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is elected, the probability that the transition or added winning will be significantly different, but the probability of being elected with the index value IV = 4 fills in the difference By being adjusted, the probability that the index value IV = 4 will be won and the transition winning or the additional winning will be the same or substantially the same among the setting values of “1” to “6” may be adopted. Also, any of these configurations may be applied to the index value IV = 2 in the BB state.

  Although the watermelon winning data may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 even if the watermelon winning data is set, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the watermelon winning data is set In this case, the watermelon winning may be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the high probability mode and the low probability mode exist such that the probability of becoming transition win is relatively high in the non-BB state and the transition lottery process to the AT state in the non-AT state. . Hereinafter, configurations of the high probability mode and the low probability mode will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the lottery mode shifting process executed by the main MPU 72. In addition, the transition process of the lottery mode is a non-BB state, and is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 27) at the end of the game in the non-AT state.

  If the current lottery mode is not the high probability mode (step S1801: NO), the condition is that one of index values IV = 4 to 6 in the non-BB state is won in the current game (step S1802: YES) And the lottery mode elevation lottery process is executed (step S1803). Only watermelon winning data is set to index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state as described above, and watermelon winning data and first compensation winning data are set to index value IV = 5 as described above. As described above, only the cherry winning data is set to the index value IV = 6. Depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that watermelon winning may not be established even if it is won with index value IV = 4, and even if it is won with index value IV = 5, each stop button 42 ~ Depending on the operation timing of 44, there is a possibility that both the watermelon winning and the first compensation winning may not be established, and even if the index value IV = 6, the cherry winning is established depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 Although there is a possibility that the game will not be performed, the promotion lottery process is executed if it is determined that the index value IV is any one of 4 to 6 even if the corresponding winning is not established. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion lottery process may be executed on the condition that the corresponding winning is established.

  In the promotion lottery process of the lottery mode, the promotion lottery table is read from the main side ROM 73, and the main RAM 74 reads the value of the lottery counter periodically (eg, 2 msec cycle) and reads the value of the lottery counter Check against the promoted lottery table. FIG. 34 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the promotion lottery table. As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the probability of being promoted to a promotion winning in the promotion lottery process is the same regardless of the index value IV = 4 to 6 being won. However, the probability of being promoted is different according to the set values “1” to “6”. Specifically, when the set value is “1”, the probability of being promoted is set to 1/6, and when the set value is “2”, the probability of being promoted is 1⁄5. If the setting value is “3”, the probability of becoming a promotion winning is set to 1⁄4, and if the setting value is “4”, the probability of becoming a promotion winning is 1⁄3. If the setting value is "5", the probability of being promoted is 1/2, and if the setting value is "1," the probability of being promoted is 1/1. It is set. As a result, the larger the setting value, the higher the probability of being promoted and won in the promoted lottery process.

  If it is determined that the player has been promoted in the promotion lottery process (step S1804: YES), "1" is set in the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1805). Thus, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode.

  If the current lottery mode is the high probability mode (step S1801: YES), the index value IV in the non-BB state in the current game is elected to any of 1 to 3 (step S1806: YES) And the demotion lottery process of the lottery mode is executed (step S1807). In the demotion lottery process of the lottery mode, the demotion lottery table is read from the main ROM 73, and the main RAM 74 reads the value of the lottery counter periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) and reads the value of the lottery counter. Match against the demoted lottery table. The demotion lottery table is common to any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 and is one common type to any of the set values “1” to “6”, and the probability of becoming a demotion win Is 1/10. If a demolition winning is made in the demolition lottery process (step S1808: YES), the high probability flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1809). Thus, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode.

  The probability of winning the transition winning in the transition lottery process to the AT state in each of the high probability mode and the low probability mode will be described. FIG. 34 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a transition winning probability in the low probability mode, and FIG. 34 (c) is an explanatory view for explaining the transition winning probability in the high probability mode.

  In the case of the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), when winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, the probability of becoming a transition winning in the transition lottery process to the AT state is 1 / The probability of being transition winning in the transition lottery processing to the AT state is 4/5 when it is 2 and the event is won with the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, the transition lottery to the AT state is performed. The probability of becoming is 2/3, and when winning with index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state, the probability of becoming transition winning in the transition lottery processing to the AT state is 5/6. As a result, the high probability mode is more likely to be transition winning in the transition lottery process to the AT state than the low probability mode.

  In the above configuration, when winning in the low probability mode with index value IV = 4 in non-BB state, probability of becoming transition winning to AT state and when winning with index value IV = 6 in non-BB state The probability of winning in transition to the AT state is common to all settings. Similarly, in the high probability mode, when it is elected with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, the probability of winning transition to the AT state and when elected with the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state. The probability of winning in transition to the AT state is common to all settings. Thereby, even in the configuration in which the low probability mode and the high probability mode exist as the lottery mode, regarding the probability of being transition winning in the transition lottery process to the AT state in the non-BB state and the non-AT state. It is possible to ensure that there are no advantages or disadvantages between settings.

  Watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV = 5 in the same manner as the index value IV = 4, and the transition lottery process to the AT state is not executed even if the index value IV = 5 is won. In this case, as in the first embodiment, the probability of winning with index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is different among the set values “1” to “6”, specifically, The larger the setting value, the lower the probability of winning with index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state. Thus, as in the first embodiment, when the watermelon winning data is set in the lottery process (FIG. 10) of the part in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state, the transition to the AT state is won. The probability increases as the setting value increases, and decreases as the setting value decreases. Also, when watermelon winning data is set, if so-called dropping does not occur or if so-called dropping occurs with a certain probability, a symbol corresponding to watermelon winning on the main line ML in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state. The probability of being won in the transition to the AT state when the combination stops is higher as the set value is larger and lower as the set value is smaller. Therefore, in the non-BB state, when the combination of symbols corresponding to watermelon winnings is stopped on the main line ML in the non-AT state, the player can set the setting value by grasping the probability that the transition to the AT state occurs It is possible to predict.

  As described above, the probability of being promoted to a promotion winning process in the promotion lottery processing for determining whether to promote the lottery mode from the low probability mode to the high probability mode becomes higher as the set value becomes larger. Thereby, the transition probability to the high probability mode is achieved in the configuration in which there is no advantage or disadvantage between settings regarding the probability of transition winning in the transition lottery process to the AT state in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state. With regard to, the larger the set value, the more advantageous it is.

<Another form of the second embodiment>
In the second embodiment, the player is not notified whether the lottery mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode. However, the player is determined which of the low probability mode and the high probability mode. It may be configured to notify to For example, as an effect in at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, an effect indicating which one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode may be performed may be performed. In addition, it may be configured to indicate an expected value of the high probability mode. For example, a low expectation degree effect, a middle expectation degree effect and a high expectation degree effect are performed as effects in at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. The configuration may be such that the expectation of being in the high probability mode is high in the order of expectation degree presentation → high expectation degree presentation.

  The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the probability that the promotion winning will be promoted in the promotion lottery process is higher, and the setting values of “1” to “3” have the same probability of becoming a promotion winning. The set values of “6” to “6” may have the same probability of being promoted to be promoted, and the latter group may have a higher probability of being promoted to be promoted than the former group. Further, the smaller the setting value, the higher the probability that the promotion winning will be achieved, or the odd setting value may be higher or lower than the even setting value.

  The probability of becoming a demolition winning in the demolition lottery process may be different depending on the set values of “1” to “6”. For example, the larger the set value is, the higher the probability that the demolition will be won, or the lower the set value, the higher the probability of being demoted, and the odd set value is set to an even number. The probability of becoming a demolition winning may be higher or lower than the value.

Third Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the number of main lines ML is set plurally unlike the first embodiment, and the type of main line ML in the case where a watermelon prize is established differs depending on the index value IV for which the winning is achieved. ing. In addition, the relationship between the mode of giving profit and the set value is also different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 35 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, four main lines ML1 to ML4 are set so as to connect positions where the symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized. The first main line ML1 is a line connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R. The second main line ML2 is a line connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. The third main line ML3 is a line connecting the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the lower symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R. The fourth main line ML4 is a line connecting the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are started to rotate with a prescribed number of medals bet, and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on any of the first to fourth main lines ML1 to ML4, A benefit of payout of medals, a benefit of replay, and a transition of the gaming state are provided. It should be noted that even if a combination of symbols to be won is established in the subline SL connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R, a prize is not established.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols serving as winnings in the first compensation winning data set to the index values IV = 1 and 5 in the non-BB state and the index value IV = 3 in the BB state is the above-described first embodiment and It is different. Specifically, the combination in which the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, and The combination in which the stop symbol of the reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol is the first compensation winning data It is set as a combination of symbols that will win a prize.

  By setting the combination of symbols to be a prize of the first compensation winning data set as described above, the watermelon with the index value IV = 4 and the index value IV = 5 in which the watermelon winning data is set in the non-BB state The main line in the case where the watermelon winning is achieved by the index value IV = 2 and the index value IV = 3 in which the watermelon winning data is set in the BB state while the types of the main lines ML1 to ML4 are different when the winning is established. The types of lines ML1 to ML4 are different. The types of main lines ML1 to ML4 when the watermelon winning is realized will be described with reference to the explanatory views of FIG. 36 (a) and FIG. 36 (b). FIG. 36 (a) is an explanatory diagram for describing types of main lines ML1 to ML4 when watermelon winning is achieved in the case of index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and in the case of index value IV = 2 in the BB state. FIG. 36 (b) illustrates the types of main lines ML1 to ML4 in the case where watermelon winning is achieved in the case of index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state and in the case of index value IV = 3 in the BB state. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 36A, in the case of the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and in the case of the index value IV = 2 in the BB state, watermelon winning is achieved on the third main line ML3. This is realized by the setting of the pull-in bit described in the first embodiment. That is, in the non-BB state, when winning with index value IV = 4 or when winning with index value IV = 2 in BB state, “watermelon” symbol is set by setting the number of acquired bits in buffer B for determination information The combination of the main line ML1 to ML4 stops at any of the main line ML1 and the priority judgment value of the symbol number becomes larger than the priority judgment value of the other symbol numbers, but by setting the pull-in bit, the "watermelon" symbol The priority determination value of the symbol number at which the combination stops at the third main line ML3 is a value larger than the priority determination value of the symbol number at which the combination of "watermelon" symbols stops on the other main lines ML1, ML2, ML4 Become. Thus, as described above, in the case of the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and in the case of the index value IV = 2 in the BB state, watermelon winning is achieved on the third main line ML3.

  As shown in FIG. 36B, in the case of index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state and in the case of index value IV = 3 in the BB state, watermelon winning is achieved on the fourth main line ML4. Not only watermelon winning data but also the first compensation winning data are set in these index values IV, and the combination of symbols to be the first compensating winning is set as described above, and the setting of the lead-in bit is the first The priority determination value of the symbol number at which the combination of "watermelon" symbols is stopped at the fourth main line ML4 is set to the other main lines ML1 to ML3 by setting that priority is given to stopping on the four main lines ML4. It becomes a value larger than the priority determination value of the symbol number in which the combination of the "watermelon" symbol stops.

  For example, for the middle reel 32M, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), when the "Replay" symbol stops in the lower part, the "watermelon" symbol stops in the middle, so the first compensation is performed in the third main line ML3 There is a possibility that a winning will be established, and a watermelon winning may be realized on the fourth main line ML4. The pull-in bit of the symbol number causing this stop mode is set to a value larger than the pull-in bit of the symbol number at which the "replay" symbol is stopped at the middle stage and the "watermelon" symbol is stopped at the upper stage. Therefore, the priority determination value of the symbol number at which the "replay" symbol stops in the lower part of the middle reel 32M becomes a value larger than the priority determination value of the other symbol numbers.

  Also, for the right reel 32R, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), when the "white 7" symbol stops in the lower row, the "watermelon" symbol stops in the upper row, so in the third main line ML3 There is a possibility that the 1-complement winning will be established, and a watermelon winning may be established in the fourth main line ML4. In this case, the priority determination value of the symbol number which causes the stop mode in relation to the acquired number bit becomes a larger value than the priority determination value of the other symbol numbers.

  As described above, when watermelon winning is achieved, the types of main lines ML1 to ML4 are the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and the index value IV = 2 in the BB state, and the index value in the non-BB state By the difference between the case of IV = 5 and the case of index value IV = 3 in the BB state, when the combination of symbols corresponding to watermelon winning is stopped, it corresponds to which index value IV It becomes possible for the player to grasp the presence or absence.

  FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the giving mode of the profit and the setting value. First, the relationship between the transition probability to the AT state in the non-BB state and the setting value will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. 37 (a).

  In the non-BB state and in the non-AT state, the transition lottery process to the AT state is executed triggered by the winning by one of the index values IV = 4 to 6. In this case, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 6 in the lottery process of the winning combination in the non-BB state (FIG. 10) is any one of “1” to “6” for the setting value of the slot machine 10 Also "155". That is, the probability of winning with the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is common to all settings. And in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state, the probability that the index value IV = 6 is won and the transition lottery to the AT state executed is a transition winning probability is 4/5 common to all settings.

  The probability of winning with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is different among the setting values “1” to “6”. Specifically, when the set value is “1”, the point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to “100”, and when the set value is “2”, the index value IV = 4 When the point value PV is set to "200" and the set value is "3", the point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to "300" and the set value is "4" The point value PV of index value IV = 4 is set to “400”, and the point value PV of index value IV = 4 is set to “500” when the setting value is “5”. When the setting value is “6”, the point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to “600”. As a result, the larger the setting value, the higher the probability that the index value IV = 4 will be won in the non-BB state. On the other hand, in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state, the index value IV = 4 is won, and the probability of the transition winning in the transition lottery process to the AT state executed is 1/2 of all settings.

  The probability of winning with the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is different among the setting values of “1” to “6”. Specifically, when the set value is “1”, the point value PV of the index value IV = 5 is set to “600”, and when the set value is “2”, the index value IV = 5 When the point value PV is set to "500" and the set value is "3", the point value PV of the index value IV = 5 is set to "400" and the set value is "4" The point value PV of index value IV = 5 is set to “300”, and the point value PV of index value IV = 5 is set to “200” when the set value is “5”. When the setting value is “6”, the point value PV of the index value IV = 5 is set to “100”. As a result, the larger the setting value, the lower the probability that the index value IV = 5 is won in the non-BB state. On the other hand, in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state, the probability of being elected with the index value IV = 5 and becoming the transition win in the transition lottery processing to the executed AT state is 1/2 of all settings common.

  In the case of the above configuration, the index value IV = 4 will be won and the transition lottery status to the AT state will be a transition winning probability, and the index value IV = 5 will be elected and the transition to the AT status lottery process Although the probability of becoming transition win will vary depending on the set value, the former has a trade-off between the part where the former's probability fluctuates according to its set value and the part where the latter's probability fluctuates according to its set value The relationship is Therefore, it is elected with index value IV = 4 and the probability that it will be transition winning by transition lottery processing to AT state, and it will be elected with index value IV = 5 and transition winning with AT state transition lottery processing The sum with the probability of becoming is common to all settings. Then, as described above, the type of main lines ML1 to ML4 in which the watermelon winning is achieved when the index value IV = 4 is won and the main line in which the watermelon winning is realized when the index value IV = 5 is won The types of ML1 to ML4 are different. This allows watermelon winning in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state while ensuring that there is no advantage or disadvantage between settings with respect to the probability of transition to the AT state in the non-BB state and in the non-AT state. The player can predict the set value by grasping the selection frequency of the main lines ML1 to ML4 in which the watermelon winning is achieved when the transition to the AT state occurs and the watermelon state is established.

  Next, the relationship between the addition probability of the number of continued games in the AT state and the setting value will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. 37 (b).

  In the AT state, the additional lottery process is executed when the player wins with one of index values IV = 4 to 6. In this case, the probability of winning in relation to the set value of index value IV = 4-6 is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 37A, and each of index values IV = 4-6 is selected. The probability of winning an addition in the additional lottery process executed as a trigger is the same as the probability of transition winning in an AT state transition lottery process executed with each of the index values IV = 4 to 6 as a trigger. As a result, when there is no advantage or disadvantage between settings with respect to the probability that the continuation of the number of continuing games occurs in the AT state, the watermelon winning is established in the AT state and the number of continuing games increases By grasping the selection frequency of the main lines ML1 to ML4 in which the watermelon winning is established, the player can predict the set value.

  Further, the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and the relationship between the probability of winning with index value IV = 5 and the setting value are the same for the AT state and the non-AT state, and the non-BB state In the non-AT state, when it is elected with index value IV = 4 or 5, the probability of becoming transition winner in the transition lottery process to the AT state and the non-BB state with index value IV = in the AT state The probability of winning in the additional lottery process when winning in 4 or 5 is the same. Thereby, when the watermelon winning is established and a benefit other than the provision of the game medium is awarded when the set value is estimated, the selection frequency of the main lines ML1 to ML4 in which the watermelon winning is established is set to the AT state It becomes possible to measure without distinguishing in both of the states. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large number of trials for predicting the setting value, and it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy of the setting value.

  Next, the relationship between the advantageous winning probability and the setting value in the BB state will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. 37 (c).

  In the BB state, the advantageous lottery process is executed when the player wins with one of the index values IV = 2 to 4. In this case, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 in the lottery process of the winning combination in the BB state (FIG. 10) may be any one of “1” to “6” for the setting value of the slot machine 10 It is "155". That is, the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the BB state is common to all settings. Then, the probability of winning with the index value IV = 4 in the BB state and being transition winning in the transition lottery process to the executed AT state is also 4/5 common to all settings.

  The probability of winning with the index value IV = 2 in the BB state is different among the setting values of “1” to “6”. Specifically, when the setting value is “1”, the point value PV of the index value IV = 2 is set to “600”, and when the setting value is “2”, the index value IV = 2 When the point value PV is set to "500" and the set value is "3", the point value PV of the index value IV = 2 is set to "400" and the set value is "4" The point value PV of index value IV = 2 is set to “300”, and the point value PV of index value IV = 2 is set to “200” when the setting value is “5”. When the setting value is “6”, the point value PV of the index value IV = 2 is set to “100”. As a result, the larger the setting value, the lower the probability that the index value IV = 2 will be won in the BB state. On the other hand, in the BB state, the probability of winning with the index value IV = 2 and being an advantageous win in the advantageous lottery process executed is 1/2 of all the settings common.

  The probability of winning with index value IV = 3 in the BB state is different among the setting values of “1” to “6”. Specifically, when the setting value is “1”, the point value PV of the index value IV = 3 is set to “100”, and when the setting value is “2”, the index value IV = 3 When the point value PV is set to "200" and the set value is "3", the point value PV with index value IV = 3 is set to "300" and the set value is "4" The point value PV of index value IV = 3 is set to “400” and the point value PV of index value IV = 3 is set to “500” when the setting value is “5”. When the setting value is “6”, the point value PV of the index value IV = 3 is set to “600”. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability that the index value IV = 3 will be won in the BB state. On the other hand, in the BB state, the probability of winning with index value IV = 3 and becoming an advantageous winning in the advantageous lottery process executed is 1/2 of all settings in common.

  In the case of the above configuration, the probability drawing process is triggered by the probability that winning will be made by the advantageous drawing process triggered by the winning by the index value IV = 2, and by the winning by the index value IV = 3. Although the probability of winning an advantageous win varies depending on the set value, a trade-off occurs between the former's probability fluctuates according to the set value and the latter's probability fluctuates according to the set value. The relationship is Therefore, the sum of the probability that the index value IV = 2 will be won and the advantageous lottery processing will be an advantageous winning, and the probability that the index value IV = 3 will be winning and the advantageous lottery processing an advantageous winning will be all set. It is common. Then, as described above, the type of main lines ML1 to ML4 in which the watermelon winning is achieved when the index value IV = 2 is won, and the main line where the watermelon winning is realized when the index value IV = 3 The types of ML1 to ML4 are different. Thereby, the main line on which the watermelon winning is achieved when the watermelon winning is established in the BB state and the advantageous winning is achieved while the advantage or disadvantage is not generated between the settings while regarding the probability of the advantageous winning in the BB state. By grasping the selection frequency of ML1 to ML4, the player can predict the set value.

  In addition, in the non-BB state, when the combination of symbols corresponding to watermelon winnings is stopped when a benefit other than the grant of gaming media is awarded, the types of mainlines ML1 to ML4 are the third mainline, the larger the setting value is. It becomes easy to become ML3 and it becomes easy to become the 4th main line ML4 as the setting value is smaller, but in the BB state, the combination of symbols corresponding to watermelon winning is given when a benefit other than the provision of game media is given. The types of main lines ML1 to ML4 to be stopped tend to be the fourth main line ML4 as the setting value is larger, and to be the third main line ML3 as the setting value is smaller. Thereby, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the watermelon winnings is likely to stop when the benefit other than the grant of the game medium is awarded, and the relationship between the main lines ML1 to ML4 and the setting value is reversed in the non-BB state and the BB state. It becomes possible to make a relationship. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the judgment index in estimating the setting value.

<Another form of the third embodiment>
-The probability of being transition winning or winning in case of winning with index value IV = 4 in non-BB state is not limited to the same configuration among the setting values of "1" to "6" The configuration may be substantially the same. In addition, the probability of being transition winning or winning in case of winning with index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is limited to the same configuration among the setting values of “1” to “6”. Instead, they may be substantially identical. Also, any of these configurations may be applied to index values IV = 2 and 3 in the BB state.

  The probability that the transition or additional winning in the non-BB state is not limited to the same configuration among the set values of “1” to “6”, and may be substantially the same as different configurations. The configuration may be significantly different. Further, the probability of becoming an advantageous winning in the BB state is not limited to the same configuration among the set values of “1” to “6”, and may be configured to be substantially the same as different ones. The configuration may be different.

  · In the non-BB state, the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 increases as the setting value increases, and in the non-BB state, the probability of winning with index value IV = 5 decreases as the setting value increases. , This relationship may be reversed. Also, the probability of winning with index value IV = 2 in the BB state decreases as the setting value increases, and the probability of winning with index value IV = 3 in the BB state increases as the setting value increases. This relationship may be reversed.

  ・ The transition winning or additional winning is achieved when the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is different among the setting values of “1” to “6” and when winning with the index value IV = 4 Although the probability of becoming is identical between the set values of “1” to “6”, conversely, the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is “1” to The same value among the set values of "6" and the probability that the transition win or the additional win will be made when the index value IV = 4 is selected is different among the set values of "1" to "6" It is good also as composition. In addition, when the probability of winning in the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is different among the setting values of “1” to “6” and the winning is made in the index value IV = 5, the transition winning or additional Although the probability of winning is identical between the set values of “1” to “6”, the probability of winning with index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is “1”, conversely to this. The probability that the transition win or the additional win will be the same when the index value IV = 5 is the same among the set values of “6” and the difference between the set values of “1” to “6” It may be configured to

  Although the first compensation winning data is set to each of the index values IV = 1 and 5 in the non-BB state, the first compensation winning data may not be set to the index value IV = 1. In this case, since the first compensation winning data is set only to the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state, it is determined that the index value IV = 5 is won when the first compensation winning prize is established. It will be clear.

  In the case of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and winning with index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state, one of the combinations of watermelon symbols is established in the main line ML, and the other is A combination of watermelon patterns may be established in the subline SL. In addition, in the configuration in which there are a plurality of sublines SL, a combination of watermelon symbols in the case of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and in the case of winning with index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state The sub lines SL in which the above may be established may be different.

  -When the player wins in any of the index values IV = 4 to 6 in the non-BB state, the transition lottery process and the additional lottery process are executed regardless of whether or not a winning corresponding to the winning combination is established. There is no limitation to the configuration, and the transition lottery process and the additional lottery process are executed on the condition that the player wins with any of the index values IV = 4 to 6 in the non-BB state and the winning corresponding to the winning combination is established. It may be configured as Similarly, the advantageous lottery process may be executed on the condition that the player wins with the index value IV = 2 to 4 in the BB state and the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established.

Fourth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the relationship between the giving mode of benefits and the set value is different from that of the third embodiment. The configuration different from that of the third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  Fig.38 (a)-FIG.38 (c) are explanatory drawings for demonstrating the relationship between the provision aspect of the profit, and a setting value in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c), the relationship between the mode of giving profit and the set value when the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is won, and the index value IV = in the BB state The relationship between the awarding mode of profit and the set value in the case of winning in 4 is the same as that in the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c), the relationship between the probability of winning index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and the set value, the probability and probability of winning index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state The relation between the value, the relation between the probability of winning index value IV = 2 in the BB state and the setting value, and the relation between the probability of winning index value IV = 3 in the BB state and the setting value are the above-described third embodiment It is identical to the form. On the other hand, the probability that a benefit other than the provision of gaming media is awarded when winning each index value IV is different from that of the third embodiment.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 38A and 38B, the probability that a benefit other than the provision of gaming media is awarded when index value IV = 4 is won in the non-BB state is set. The value is 1/1 when the value is "1", 1/2 when the set value is "2", and 1/3 when the set value is "3". In the case of "4", it is 1/4, in the case where the set value is "5", it is 1/5, and in the case where the set value is "6", it is 1/6. Further, the probability that a benefit other than the provision of gaming media is awarded when the index value IV = 5 is won in the non-BB state is, as shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b), “set value It is 1/6 in the case of 1 ", 1/5 in the case of the set value of" 2 "and 1/4 in the case of the set value of" 3 ", and the set value of" 4 " In the case of (1), it is 1/3, when the set value is "5", it is 1/2, and when the set value is "6", it is 1/1.

  With the above configuration, the probability that the watermelon winning is achieved on the third main line ML3 when benefits other than the provision of game media are awarded is common to all settings, and benefits other than the provision of game media are awarded. In this case, the probability that the watermelon winning is achieved on the fourth main line ML4 is common to all settings. On the other hand, the probability that a benefit other than the provision of game media is given to the fact that the watermelon winning is established on the third main line ML3, and the award of the game media against the fact that the watermelon winning is realized on the fourth main line ML4. The probability that a benefit other than that is given is different at the setting values of "1" to "6". Specifically, the probability that a benefit other than the provision of gaming media is given to the third main line ML3 is lower as the setting value is larger, and the fourth main line ML4 has a watermelon prize The probability that a benefit other than the grant of gaming media is granted for the establishment is higher as the setting value is larger. Thus, the player predicts the set value by grasping the types of main lines ML1 to ML4 in which the watermelon winning is established and the probability that a benefit other than the provision of gaming media to the establishment of the watermelon winning is provided. Is possible.

  Further, even with such a configuration, the probability that the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won and the probability that a benefit other than the provision of gaming media is provided is common to all settings and the index value in the non-BB state The probability of winning with IV = 5 and granting a benefit other than the grant of gaming media is common to all settings. As a result, in the non-BB state, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while ensuring that there is no advantage or disadvantage between settings with respect to the probability that benefits other than the game media will be awarded.

  The probability that an index value IV = 2 is won in the BB state and a benefit other than the provision of gaming media is given is 1/6 when the set value is “1” as shown in FIG. 38 (c). Yes, it is 1/5 when the setting value is "2", 1/4 when the setting value is "3", and 1/3 when the setting value is "4". When the setting value is "5", it is 1/2, and when the setting value is "6", it is 1/1. Further, the probability that an index value IV = 3 is won in the BB state and a benefit other than the provision of gaming media is given is 1 / if the setting value is "1", as shown in FIG. 38 (c). It is 1 when the setting value is "2", 1/2 when it is "3", and 1/4 when the setting value is "4". If the set value is “5”, it is 1⁄5, and if the set value is “6”, it is 1⁄6.

  With the above configuration, the probability that the watermelon winning will be established on the third main line ML3 is common to all settings when a benefit other than the provision of game media is provided also with respect to the BB state. The probability that the watermelon winning is achieved on the fourth main line ML4 when a profit is given is common to all settings. On the other hand, the probability that a benefit other than the provision of game media is given to the fact that the watermelon winning is established on the third main line ML3, and the award of the game media against the fact that the watermelon winning is realized on the fourth main line ML4. The probability that a benefit other than that is given is different at the setting values of "1" to "6". Specifically, the probability that a benefit other than the provision of game media is given to the third main line ML3 having a watermelon winning is higher as the set value is larger, and the fourth main line ML4 has a watermelon winning The probability that a benefit other than the grant of game media is granted for the establishment is lower as the setting value is larger. Thus, the player predicts the set value by grasping the types of main lines ML1 to ML4 in which the watermelon winning is established and the probability that a benefit other than the provision of gaming media to the establishment of the watermelon winning is provided. Is possible.

  In the non-BB state, the probability that a benefit other than the provision of gaming media is given to the third main line ML3 is lower as the watermelon winning is established, the lower the setting value, the lower the probability that the fourth main line ML4 is watermelon. While the probability that a benefit other than the grant of gaming media is awarded increases as the setting value increases with respect to the winning being established, the watermelon winning is established in the third main line ML3 in the BB state. On the other hand, the probability that a benefit other than the grant of gaming media is granted is higher as the setting value is larger, and the probability that a benefit other than the grant of gaming media is awarded for the watermelon winning being established on the fourth main line ML4. The lower the value, the lower the set value. As a result, the relationship between the probability that a benefit other than the provision of gaming media is given to the third main line ML3 or the fourth main line ML4 and the setting value may be a non-BB state and a BB state. It is possible to make the relationship reverse. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the judgment index in estimating the setting value.

Fifth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the winning data set to the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state and the winning data set to the index value IV = 3 in the BB state are different from the third embodiment. The configuration different from that of the third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 39 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the lottery table for the normal mode in the setting value of "3", and FIG. 39 (b) is for explaining the lottery table for BB in the setting value of "3". FIG.

  Bell winning data and watermelon winning data are set to the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state as shown in FIG. 39 (a), and the index value IV = 3 in the BB state as shown in FIG. 39 (b). The bell winning data and the watermelon winning data are set in. In this case, the number of provided game media in the case of the bell prize is “9”, and the number of provided game media in the case of the watermelon prize is “7”. Therefore, when it is elected with index value IV = 5 in non-BB state or index value IV = 3 in BB state, the combination of "bell" symbols is either by the setting of the acquisition number bit in buffer B for judgment information. The priority determination value of symbol numbers stopped in the main lines ML1 to ML4 is a larger value than the priority determination value of symbol numbers stopped in any of the main lines ML1 to ML4 of the combination of "watermelon" symbols. Therefore, in the case of winning with the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state or the index value IV = 3 in the BB state, the bell winning is prioritized over the watermelon winning. The winning probability of index values IV = 1 to 3 in the non-BB state is common to all settings, and the winning probability of index value IV = 1 in the BB state is common to all settings.

  By setting the relationship between the provision mode of the benefit and the set value as described in the third embodiment in the above configuration, the watermelon winning is established and a benefit other than the provision of the game medium is awarded. The probability and the probability that the bell prize is established and the benefit other than the provision of the game medium is given vary according to the set value, but the former's probability varies according to the set value, The latter probability has a trade-off relationship with the amount of fluctuation according to the set value. Therefore, the sum of the probability that the watermelon prize is established and the benefit other than the provision of the game medium is granted, and the probability that the bell prize is established and the benefit other than the provision of the game medium is conferred is common to all settings. There is. In this way, there is no advantage or disadvantage between the settings with respect to the probability that a benefit other than the provision of game media will be awarded when a prize corresponding to the provision of game media is established, while the benefit other than the provision of game media is The player can predict the set value by grasping the ratio of the watermelon winning and the bell winning which are established in the case where is awarded.

Sixth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the trigger for adding the number of continuing games in the AT state is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of symbols to be won in the present embodiment and the benefit given when a prize is won.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the first compensation prize, the second compensation prize, the third compensation prize, the bell prize, the watermelon prize, the cherry prize, the regular replay prize, the first RT replay prize, the second RT replay A win, a first fall replay, a second fall replay, a first BB win and a second BB win are set. Further, in the present embodiment, the special replay prize, the first special replay prize, the second special replay prize, the third special replay prize, and the fourth special replay prize as prizes to which the bonus for replay is given other than the above respective prizes. Winnings, fifth special replay winnings and sixth special replay winnings are set.

  In the case where the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol on the mainline ML , Special Replay win. If the stop symbol on the left reel 32L is the “red 7” symbol on the main line ML, the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M is the “replay” symbol, and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is the “replay” symbol, 1 Special Replay Award. In the main line ML, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol, It will be the second special replay prize. In the main line ML, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol, It will be the third special replay prize. If the stop symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Replay" symbol on the main line ML, the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "White 7" symbol, and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Replay" symbol, then 4 Special Replay Award. In the main line ML, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the “replay” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the “white 7” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the “red 7” symbol, It will be the fifth special replay prize. The stop symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "Replay" symbol, the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Replay" symbol, and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Red 7" symbol. 6 Special Replay Award.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram for describing a second RT mode lottery table with a setting value of “3”.

  The same winning data as the first embodiment is set to the index value IV = 1-15. In the present embodiment, the index value IV = 16 is also present, and the index value IV = 16 is the normal replay winning data, the special replay winning data, the first special replay winning data, the second special replay winning data, the third special replay. Winning data, fourth special replay winning data, fifth special replay winning data, and sixth special replay winning data are set. When the first stop is the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M when the index value IV = 16 is won, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the first stop is the right reel 32R when the index value IV = 16 is won, the special replay winning is realized if the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is a predetermined operation timing, and each stop button When the operation timing of 42 to 44 is not the predetermined operation timing, any one of the first to sixth special replay winnings is surely established.

  In the AT state and in the second RT mode, that is, in the ART state, when the index value IV = 16 is won, the first reel 32R is stopped for the first time and the symbol corresponding to the special replay winning is realized. A notification to stop the combination of is executed by the image display device 63. The notification is started by the time the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started and it is possible to perform the first stop. By stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in accordance with the notification, a special replay prize is established on the main line ML. Then, when the special replay winning combination is established, the additional lottery process of the number of continued games in the AT state is executed. By the way, it is not possible to establish the special replay prize of the one that won the index value IV = 16 in the ART state, but also when the normal replay prize and any of the first to sixth special replay prizes are established The lottery process is executed. That is, when the player wins with the index value IV = 16 in the ART state, the additional lottery process is executed regardless of the winning result. However, if index Tsu IV = 16 is won in the ART state, the additional lottery process may be executed on the condition that the special replay prize is established, and whether or not the special replay prize is established The additional lottery process may be executed on the condition that the right reel 32R is stopped first regardless of the above.

  In the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the BB lottery table, the role corresponding to the index value IV = 16 is not set. Therefore, the special replay prize and the first to sixth special replay prizes are prizes that are established only in the second RT mode, and are not established in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the BB state.

  An additional processing for executing the addition of the number of continuing games in the ART state will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the processing for addition is not only in the ART state, but in the situation where the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more after transitioning from the ART preparation state to the ART state Is also performed in After transitioning from the ART preparation state to the ART state, even when the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more and the situation falls to either the first RT mode or the normal mode, every time one game is digested Since the value of the ART game number counter is to be subtracted, the additional processing is executed even in the corresponding situation.

  In the addition processing, when the index value IV = 4, 6 or 16 is won in the second RT mode (steps S1901 and S1902: YES), the first addition table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1903). On the other hand, when the winning is made with the index value IV = 4 or 6 instead of the second RT mode (step S1901: NO, step S1904: YES), the second addition table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1905).

  When the process of step S1903 or step S1905 is executed, the additional lottery process is executed (step S1906). In the additional lottery process, the main RAM 74 reads out the value of the lottery counter periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle), and the value of the lottery counter is read against the first or second additional table read out. Match. If the result of the additional lottery process is the additional winning (step S1907: YES), "50" is added as the number of additional games to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1908). As a result, the number of continued games in one execution of the ART state is increased.

  FIG. 43 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the first additional table. In the first additional table, 100 random number values are set to index value IV = 4 as random number values to be added in the additional lottery process, and 100 random number values are set to index value IV = 6. The random number is set to 300 and is set to the index value IV = 16. In the additional lottery process, the value of the lottery counter of the main side RAM 74 is used as described above, but the lottery counter is a loop counter updated in the range of “0” to “399”. . That is, 400 random numbers can be acquired from the lottery counter. Therefore, in the case of winning with index value IV = 4, and with index value IV = 6, the probability of winning with additional in the additional lottery process is 1/4, and index value IV = If the player wins in 16, the probability of winning in the extra lottery process is 3/4.

  FIG. 43 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a second addition table. In the second additional table, 400 random number values are set to index value IV = 4 as random number values to be added in the additional lottery process, and 100 random number values are set to index value IV = 6. It is set. The random number value that can be acquired from the lottery counter used in the additional lottery process is 400 as already described. Therefore, when winning with index value IV = 4, the probability of winning with additional in the additional lottery processing is 1/1, and when winning with index value IV = 6, the additional lottery processing is performed. The probability of winning an additional prize is 1/4.

  Here, in the second RT mode lottery table, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is “655”, and the point value PV set to the index value IV = 6 is “155”. The point value PV set to the index value IV = 16 is “655”. On the other hand, in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is “655”, and the point value PV set to the index value IV = 6 is It is "155". If it does so, it will become 655x1 / 4 + 155x1 / 4 + 655x3 / 4 if it is 2 RT mode and it will become if it is normal mode and the 1st RT mode if it is 2 RT mode and the probability that it will be added winning in the addition lottery process will be represented by point value PV. It becomes 655 × 1/1 + 155 × 1/4. That is, in the second RT mode and in the normal mode and the first RT mode, the probability of winning in the additional lottery process is the same. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged with respect to the probability of winning an additional prize even if the player falls into the normal mode or the first RT mode during the ART state. In addition, the number of continued games to be awarded when the additional prize is won is constant. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantageous with respect to the expected value of the number of continued games to be added even if the player falls into the normal mode or the first RT mode during the ART state.

<Another form of the sixth embodiment>
In the first additional table, all the numbers of the winning values set to the index value IV = 16 are assigned to the number of winning values having the index value IV = 4 in the second additional table, but The number of winning values set to index value IV = 16 in the first addition table is not limited to this, and is distributed to index values IV = 4 and 6 in the second addition table, respectively. It is good also as composition. Further, the distribution ratio may be different depending on the set value of “1” to “6”. Specifically, the larger the set value, the larger the distribution ratio to the index value IV = 4 side in the second addition table, and the smaller the set value, the larger the distribution ratio to the index value IV = 6 side in the second addition table. It is good also as composition. Thereby, when the additional drawing process is executed using the second additional table, the occurrence frequency of the addition when the index value IV = 4 is won and the case where the index value IV = 6 is won. It is possible to make the player predict the set value from the ratio to the occurrence frequency of the addition.

  Although the probability of occurrence of the addition is the same in the case where the first addition table is referred to and the case where the second addition table is referred to, the invention is not limited to this and the probability of occurrence of addition is The different configurations may be substantially the same. Further, although the expected value of the number of added games is the same in the case where the first additional table is referred to and the case where the second additional table is referred to, the expected value is not limited to this. The different configurations may be substantially the same.

  The number of additional games to be selected in the case of the additional winning in the additional lottery process is not limited to the configuration having one type, and is selected from among the number of additional games existing in a plurality of types. It is also good.

  In the normal mode and the first RT mode, the combination corresponding to the index value IV = 16 in the second RT mode is not limited to a configuration in which the role as the lottery target does not exist, and even in the normal mode and the first RT mode A combination corresponding to index value IV = 16 in the second RT mode (hereinafter, also referred to as a response combination) may be present as a combination for the lottery. In this case, the winning probability of the corresponding combination in the normal mode and the first RT mode is lower than the winning probability of the index value IV = 16 in the second RT mode, and the second additional table is referred to. It is good also as composition which may become an additional winning with the opportunity being won by the above-mentioned correspondence part. In this configuration, the second additional table is obtained by increasing the number of winning values assigned to the above-mentioned response in the second additional table over the number of winning values allocated to the index value IV = 16 in the first additional table. When the table is referred to, the expected value of the number of additional games may be the same as or substantially the same as when the first additional table is referred to. In addition, the number of winning values assigned to the corresponding part in the second additional table is the same as or smaller than the number of winning values assigned to the index value IV = 16 in the first additional table, and the second additional By making the number of winning values assigned to the index value IV = 4 or 6 in the table larger than in the case of the first additional table, the expected value of the number of additional games when the second additional table is referenced is the first additional It may be the same as or substantially the same as when the table is referred to.

  The expected value of the number of added games when the second added table is referred to by making only the number of winning values set to the index value IV = 4 higher in the second added table than in the case of the first table Is not limited to the same or substantially the same configuration as when the first addition table is referred to, and the number of winning values set to the index value IV = 4 in the second addition table and the index value IV = The second additional table is referred to by making both of the average values of the number of additional games to be awarded when the additional event is won triggered by having won 4 different from when the first additional table is referred to. The expected value of the additional game number may be the same as or substantially the same as when the first additional table is referred to.

Seventh Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the processing for addition is different from that of the sixth embodiment. The configuration different from the sixth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the process for adding in the present embodiment.

  In the additional processing, it is determined whether or not the index value IV = 4 or 6 is won in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, and whether the index value IV = 16 in the second RT mode It is determined whether or not it is (step S2001). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, an additional lottery process is executed (step S2002). In the additional lottery process, the additional lottery table is read from the main ROM 73, and the main RAM 74 reads the value of the lottery counter periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) and the value of the lottery counter is read. Match against the table. Unlike the sixth embodiment, the additional lottery table has the number of winning random numbers set for the index value IV = 4 in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. The number of winning random numbers set for the index value IV = 6 is fixed at 100, respectively. Further, the number of winning random numbers set for the index value IV = 16 in the second RT mode is fixed at 100.

  In the case of the additional winning in the additional lottery process (step S2003: YES), if it is the second RT mode (step S2004: YES), the index value IV won in the current game is "4", "6" In either case of “16” or “16”, “50” is added as the number of added games to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2005). On the other hand, if it is the normal mode or the first RT mode (step S2004: NO), and if the index value IV selected in the current game is "6" (step S2006: NO), then the number of ART games in the main side RAM 74 If "50" is added as the number of games to be added to the counter (step S2005), and the index value IV that is won in the current game is "4" (step S2006: YES), the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 "100" is added as the number of games to be added to (step S2007).

  In the second RT mode lottery table, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is “655”, and the point value PV set to the index value IV = 6 is “155”, and the index value is The point value PV set to IV = 16 is “655”. On the other hand, in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is “655”, and the point value PV set to the index value IV = 6 is It is "155". In addition, the probability of becoming an additional winning in the additional lottery process is 1 in any of the cases where index value IV = 4, index value IV = 6, and index value IV = 16 in the second RT mode. / 4. In addition, the number of added games to be awarded when added in the additional lottery process is 50 games regardless of the index value IV = 4, 6 or 16 in the second RT mode. In the normal mode and the first RT mode, there are 100 games in the case of the index value IV = 4 and 50 games in the case of the index value IV = 6. Then, the expected value of the number of added games is 50 × 1/4 × 655/65536 + 50 × 1/4 × 155/65536 + 50 × 1/4 × 655/65536 in the case of the second RT mode, and usually In the case of the mode and the first RT mode, it is 100 × 1/4 × 655/65536 + 50 × 1/4 × 155/65536. That is, the expected value of the number of added games is the same in the second RT mode and in the normal mode and the first RT mode. As a result, even if the player falls into the normal mode or the first RT mode in the middle of the ART state, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantageous with respect to the expectation value of the number of added games to be awarded.

Another Form of the Seventh Embodiment
The number of additional games to be selected in the case of the additional winning in the additional lottery process is not limited to the configuration having one type, and is selected from among the number of additional games existing in a plurality of types. It is also good. In this case, in the second RT mode, the expected value of the number of added games when the player wins with index value IV = 4 and wins with additional player wins with index value IV = 16 in the second RT mode. If the first additional table is referred to or the second additional table is referred to by raising the expected value of the number of additional games in the case of winning, the expected value of the number of additional games is the same or substantially the same. It becomes possible to

Eighth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the processing for addition is different from that of the sixth embodiment. The configuration different from the sixth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the overlaying process in the present embodiment.

  In the addition processing, when the index value IV = 4, 6 or 16 is won in the second RT mode (step S 2101 and step S 2102: YES), the first addition table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S 2103). On the other hand, if the player is elected with the index value IV = 4 or 6 instead of the second RT mode, or does not win any index value IV (step S2101: NO, step S2104: YES), the second addition table It is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2105).

  When the process of step S2103 or step S2105 is executed, the additional lottery process is executed (step S2106). In the additional lottery process, the main RAM 74 reads out the value of the lottery counter periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle), and the value of the lottery counter is read against the first or second additional table read out. Match. If the result of the additional lottery process is the additional winning (step S2107: YES), "50" is added as the number of additional games to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2108). As a result, the number of continued games in one execution of the ART state is increased.

  FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the first additional table. In the first additional table, 100 random number values are set to index value IV = 4 as random number values to be added in the additional lottery process, and 100 random number values are set to index value IV = 6. The random number is set to 300 and is set to the index value IV = 16. The random number value that can be acquired from the lottery counter used in the additional lottery process is 400. Therefore, in the case of winning with index value IV = 4, and with index value IV = 6, the probability of winning with additional in the additional lottery process is 1/4, and index value IV = If the player wins in 16, the probability of winning in the extra lottery process is 3/4.

  FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a second addition table. In the second addition table, 100 random number values are set to the index value IV = 4 as random number values to be added in the addition lottery process, and 100 index values are set to the index value IV = 6. It is set, and 300 random values are set to the outlier. The random number value that can be acquired from the lottery counter used in the additional lottery process is 400 as already described. Therefore, when the index value IV = 4 is won, the probability that the addition lottery is won in the additional lottery process is 1/4, and when the index value IV = 6 is won, the additional lottery process is performed. The probability of winning the winning prize is 1/4, and if it is a losing result, the probability of winning the winning bonus in the winning lottery process is 3/4.

  Here, in the second RT mode lottery table, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is “655”, and the point value PV set to the index value IV = 6 is “155”. The point value PV set to the index value IV = 16 is “655”. On the other hand, in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table in the present embodiment, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is “655”, and is set to the index value IV = 6. The point value PV is “155”, and the point value PV resulting from the deviation is “655”. If it does so, it will become 655x1 / 4 + 155x1 / 4 + 655x3 / 4 in 2nd RT mode if it will be expressed in point value PV with the probability that it will be added winning in the additional lottery process, and if it is normal mode and 1st RT mode It becomes 655 × 1/4 + 155 × 1/4 + 655 × 3/4. That is, in the second RT mode and in the normal mode and the first RT mode, the probability of winning in the additional lottery process is the same. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged with respect to the probability of winning an additional prize even if the player falls into the normal mode or the first RT mode during the ART state. In addition, the number of continued games to be awarded when the additional prize is won is constant. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantageous with respect to the expected value of the number of continued games to be added even if the player falls into the normal mode or the first RT mode during the ART state.

Another Form of the Eighth Embodiment
-Although the number of winning values set to index value IV = 16 in the first additional table is set to the out-of-place result of the lottery process for the combination in the second additional table, The present invention is not limited to the above, and may be set to an index value IV other than the index value IV = 4 and 6 serving as the lottery object in common in the normal mode and the first RT mode. For example, the index value IV may be set to any of 1 to 3.

The ninth embodiment
In this embodiment, the trigger for adding the number of continuing games in the AT state is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory view for explaining the normal mode lottery table in the case of the setting value of “3”, and FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining a relation between an order and a winning combination established.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the same winning data as index values IV = 1 to 3 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment is set to index values IV = 1 to 3 . Further, the same winning data as the index value IV = 4 to 12 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment is set to the index value IV = 5 to 13. Only the bell winning data is set to the index value IV = 4. Then, when the index value IV = 4, the bell winning is achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second RT mode lottery table in the case of the setting value of “3”, and FIG. 50 is a reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the second mode lottery table is selected. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of, and the winning a prize aspect materialized.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the same winning data as index values IV = 1 to 3 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment is set to index values IV = 1 to 3 and There is. The same winning data as the index values IV = 4 to 15 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment is set to the index values IV = 5 to 16. Only the bell winning data is set to the index value IV = 4. Then, when the index value IV = 4 is won, as shown in FIG. 50, the bell winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

  Although illustration is omitted, only bell winning data is set to the index value IV = 4 for the first RT mode lottery table as well as the normal mode lottery table and the second RT mode lottery table. When the winning is made with the value IV = 4, the bell winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, the same winning data as index values IV = 1 to 3 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is set to index values IV = 1 to 3 and index value IV is set. The same winning data as the index values IV = 4 to 19 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is set to 5 to 20.

  Next, the special display unit 100 will be described.

  The special display unit 100 is provided on the game panel 20 of the front door 12 at a position below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. In the special display unit 100, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, a display corresponding to the notified contents is performed. FIG. 51A is a front view of the special display unit 100. FIG.

  The special display unit 100 is provided with seven display segments 101 to 107. Each of the display segments 101 to 107 has an individual light source formed of an LED, and it is possible to turn on only one arbitrary display segment 101 to 107 by on / off control of the individual light sources. While being possible, the display segments 101-107 of arbitrary combinations can be made to light. The individual light sources all emit light of the same color, so the same color is displayed in each of the display segments 101 to 107, but the invention is not limited thereto. Different colors may be displayed in the display segments 101 to 107, or a plurality of colors may be displayed on each of the display segments 101 to 107. The first to seventh display segments 101 to 107 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 101 to 107 are arranged so as to be a so-called seven-segment display. Thereby, in the special display unit 100, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of display such as numbers "0" to "9" and alphabet "H". In addition, the special display unit 100 is not limited to the configuration as a segment display as described above, and it is possible to display a plurality of types of symbols, numbers, or characters, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL Other types of display devices such as devices, CRTs, dot matrices, etc. may be used.

  In the slot machine 10, when the player wins with one of the index values IV = 1 to 3, a bell prize occurs when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a predetermined stop order. Further, when the lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed using the normal mode lottery table (FIGS. 47 and 48), the reel 32L is selected when the index value IV = 10 to 13 is won. , 32M, and 32R when the stop order becomes the predetermined stop order, and the first RT replay winning is established, and the lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed using the first RT mode lottery table, the index value IV = When the player wins the game in any of 10 to 13, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes the predetermined stop order, and the second RT replay winning is achieved. When the lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed using the first RT mode lottery table, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped when the player wins by one of the index values IV = 14-19. When the order becomes a predetermined stop order, the normal replay winning is achieved, and in the other cases, the first falling replay winning is established. When the lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed using the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 49 and FIG. 50), the reel is selected when the index value IV = 10 to 15 is won. When the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R is a predetermined stop order, the normal replay winning is achieved, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning is achieved.

  As described above, in the configuration in which winning modes are different according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the first stop is the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be notified by the image display device 63. The stop order in which the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for the second stop and the third stop are the left reel 32L and arbitrary, and the reels 32L, 32M for the second stop and the third stop are the first reel 32M. , 32R types are arbitrary, the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the types of the second stop and third stop reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arbitrary, and the first stop is the left The stop order is the reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the right reel 32R. There is a stop order in which the third stop is the middle reel 32M, a stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is medium. The stop order is the reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel There is a stop order of 32M and a stop order of the first stop being the right reel 32R, the second stop being the middle reel 32M, and the third stop being the left reel 32L. There are nine types of stop orders in total. The details will be described later, but in the non-BB state, when the index value is IV = 4, only the bell winning data is set as the winning data, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each stop Although the bell winning is established regardless of the operation timing of the buttons 42 to 44, the image display device 63 may notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  In the above configuration, in the special display unit 100, a display corresponding to the content notified by the image display device 63 is performed in relation to the winning combination. The display contents of the special display unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (b).

  The display content of the special display unit 100 is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the notification content of the above eight types of stop orders in the image display device 63, and is elected with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state. In this case, the notification of the stop order is set corresponding to the notification by the image display device 63. Specifically, in response to the notification that the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is optional is performed by the image display device 63, the number "0" is set as the display content. The number “1” is set as the display content in response to the notification that the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest is optional is performed by the image display device 63. Is the right reel 32R, and the remaining is arbitrary. The number "2" is set as the display content corresponding to the notification by the image display device 63 indicating that the first stop is the left reel 32L. In response to the notification that the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R is performed by the image display device 63, the number "3" is set as the display content. First stop Corresponding to notification by the image display device 63 indicating that the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the number “4” is set as the display content And the notification indicating that the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R is made to correspond to the image display device 63 being performed. The indication that the number 5 "is set as the display content, indicating that the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L is sent to the image display device 63. And the number "6" is set as the display content corresponding to the event being performed, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The number "7" is set as the display content corresponding to the notification to be performed by the image display device 63, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third In response to the notification that the stop is the left reel 32L is performed by the image display device 63, the numeral "8" is set as the display content, and the player is elected with the index value IV = 4 The letter "H" is set as the display content in accordance with.

  Since the display contents of the special display unit 100 are set as described above, the display contents of the special display unit 100 do not overlap between different types of notification contents in the image display device 63. This makes it possible to associate the display content of the special display unit 100 with the notification content in the image display device 63. In addition, the display content of the special display unit 100 is set to correspond to each of the above notification contents in the image display device 63 in a one-to-one correspondence, and the configuration is not limited. A plurality of types of display contents of the special display unit 100 may be set to correspond to all of them. Even in this case, the display content of the special display unit 100 can be associated with the notification content in the image display device 63 by preventing the display content of the special display unit 100 from overlapping between different types of notification contents. It becomes possible.

  52 (a) and 52 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content in the image display device 63 and the display content in the special display unit 100. FIG.

  When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 52 (a1), the same number as the number of stop operations required to end the game The unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and image display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in each of the unit display images G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 52 (a1) shows that the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The left unit display image G1 displays an image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, and the middle unit display image G2 displays an image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M. The right unit display image G3 displays an image “3” corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R.

  While the image display device 63 displays an image notifying the stopping order itself of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as described above, the special display unit 100 displays the above-mentioned reels as shown in FIG. 52 (a2). Display of "5" corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. That is, in the image display device 63, unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed and in the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R in each unit display image G1 to G3. While the corresponding image display is performed, the special display unit 100 displays a display unrelated to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, even if the display corresponding to the notification content of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in the special display unit 100, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display content in the image display device 63.

  Similarly, when notifying the type of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped first, as shown in FIG. 52 (b1), the image display device 63 displays a left unit display image G4 corresponding to the left reel 32L. A middle unit display image G5 corresponding to the middle reel 32M and a right unit display image G6 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. Then, FIG. 52 (b1) shows that the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop and the third stop are optional, so the left unit display image G4 is displayed. The image corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L is not displayed, the image of “1” corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M is displayed in the middle unit display image G5, and the right reel is displayed in the right unit display image G6. Images corresponding to the stop order of 32R are not displayed. Then, in the special display section 100, as shown in FIG. 52 (b2), the display of "1" corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

  Here, the display range of the special display unit 100 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63. This makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the special display unit 100 compared to the image display device 63. Further, the special display unit 100 exists on the opposite side of the image display device 63 with the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R between which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are visible. As a result, the special display unit 100 is disposed at a position away from the image display device 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the special display unit 100.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the notification control process executed in step S411 of the lottery process (FIG. 10) in the main MPU 72.

  In the notification control process, when the index value IV = 1 to 3 is won (step S2201: YES), the value of the AT state counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2202: YES), the first display data setting process is executed (step S2203). In the first display data setting process, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, the type of data of the display contents corresponding to the stop order enabling the occurrence of the bell winning in the index value IV that has been won this time Understand Then, data of display content of the recognized type is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and display control of the special display unit 100 is executed according to the read data of the display content. As a result, the display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the occurrence of the bell winning is started on the special display unit 100.

  Thereafter, a notification execution command and a stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect MPU 82 (step S2204). The notification execution command is a command for causing the effect MPU 82 to recognize that the notification related to the winning combination should be performed in the current game, and the stop order command is the reels 32L, 32M, and to be notified in the current game. This is a command for causing the effect side MPU 82 to recognize the stop order of 32R. Only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set as a transmission target regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. The stop order command is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the type of stop order to be notified by the image display device 63, and in step S2204 the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling generation of a bell prize. Is read out from the main ROM 73 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S2204 are sent to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  In the notification control process, the player is elected to the combination that enables the occurrence of the first RT replay winning or the combination that enables the occurrence of the second RT replay winning (step S2205: YES). If the value is “1” or “2” (step S2206: YES), setting processing of the first display data is executed (step S2207). In the setting process of the first display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, it is possible to generate the first RT replay winning if the winning combination enabling the occurrence of the first RT replay winning is won. The type of data of the display content corresponding to the stop order to be held is grasped, and if it is won by the combination that enables the occurrence of the second RT replay winning, it corresponds to the stop order enabling the occurrence of the second RT replay winning Understand the type of data displayed. Then, data of display content of the recognized type is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and display control of the special display unit 100 is executed according to the read data of the display content. As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which enables the occurrence of the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is started on the special display unit 100.

  Thereafter, a notification execution command and a stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect MPU 82 (step S2208). Only one type of notification execution command is set as described above, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. With regard to the stop order command, among the first RT replay win and the second RT replay win, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the occurrence of wins corresponding to the current winning combination among the first RT replay win and the second RT replay win It is read from the ROM 73 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S2208 are sent to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  In the notification control process, the AT state counter of the main RAM 74 is selected when the player is selected to be a combination that enables the generation of the first fall replay prize or a combination that enables the generation of the second fall replay prize (step S2209: YES). If the value of is 2 or the value of the AT state counter is 1 and it is not the second RT mode (step S2210: YES, step S2211: NO), the first display data setting process is executed. (Step S2212). In the setting process of the first display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, if it is a winning combination that enables the occurrence of the first fall replay replay winning occurrence of the first fall replay replay winning It is possible to avoid the occurrence of the second fall replay replay if it is possible to grasp the type of data of the display content corresponding to the stop order that can be avoided and to win the combination that enables the occurrence of the second fall replay replay. Understand the type of data in the display content that corresponds to the order of stopping. Then, data of display content of the recognized type is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and display control of the special display unit 100 is executed according to the read data of the display content. As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started on the special display unit 100, which can prevent the occurrence of the first falling replay winning or the second falling replay winning.

  Thereafter, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect MPU 82 (step S2213). Only one type of notification execution command is set as described above, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. With regard to the stop order command, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can prevent the occurrence of the winning side corresponding to the current winning combination among the first fall replay prize and the second fall replay win Are read from the main ROM 73 and set as transmission targets. The various commands set in step S2213 are transmitted to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  In addition, when the value of the AT state counter is “1”, it is an ART preparation state, and in the ART preparation state, when it is the second RT mode, it is won as the role that enables the generation of the second fall replay replay prize. Even if the stop order for avoiding the occurrence of the second fall replay prize is not notified, a trigger to shift to the first RT mode is generated when the ART preparation state is started in the second RT mode. It is possible to The transition from the ART preparation state to the ART state occurs when transitioning from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. Therefore, when the ART preparation state is started in the second RT mode, the transition to the first RT mode is performed once. It is possible to secure an opportunity to generate an opportunity for transition from the ART preparation state to the ART state.

  In the notification control process, a process for dummy notification is executed in addition to the above-described various processes (step S2214). The dummy notification process will be described later.

  Next, the notification process executed by the effect side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The notification process is performed, for example, in a cycle of 4 msec.

  When both the notification execution command and the stop order command are received from the main side MPU 72 (step S 2301: YES), the image of the stop order of the reels 32 L, 32 M, 32 R corresponding to the stop order command is Data necessary for display is set (step S2302). However, at this timing, the image in the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is not displayed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in the measurement counter provided in the effect RAM 84 (step S2303). The notification delay period is set as a period shorter than an acceleration period until the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate and become constant speed rotation, and is set to 0.5 msec, for example. The value set in the measurement counter is subtracted each time the notification process is started.

  In the process for notification, when the notification delay period measured using the measurement counter of the effect side RAM 84 has elapsed (step S2304: YES), the notification start process is executed (step S2305). In the notification start process, an image is displayed on the image display device 63 based on the data set in step S2302. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (a1) and FIG. 52 (b1), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is displayed on the image display device 63.

  In the process for notification, other processes are executed (step S2306). In the other processes, for example, when the game end command is received from the main MPU 72, the display of the image finally displayed on the image display device 63 in the game is ended and the image waiting for the start of the next game Start the display of. In this case, when the game end command is received in a state where the image notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed, the display of the image notifying the stop order is ended.

  Next, an addition process for executing addition of the number of continuing games in the ART state will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the processing for addition is not only in the ART state, but in the situation where the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more after transitioning from the ART preparation state to the ART state Is also performed in After transitioning from the ART preparation state to the ART state, even when the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more and the situation falls to either the first RT mode or the normal mode, every time one game is digested Since the value of the ART game number counter is to be subtracted, the additional processing is executed even in the corresponding situation.

  In the processing for addition, when winning is made in any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 in the non-BB state (step S2401: YES), the addition lottery processing is executed (step S2402). In the additional lottery process, the additional lottery table is read from the main ROM 73, and the main RAM 74 reads the value of the lottery counter periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) and the value of the lottery counter is read. Match against the table. The contents of the additional lottery table will be described later. If it is determined in the additional lottery process that the additional prize is won (step S 2403: YES), “50” is added as the additional game number to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S 2404). As a result, the number of continued games in the ART state is increased.

  Next, the processing for dummy notification performed in step S2214 of the notification control processing (FIG. 53) in the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  If the value of the AT status counter of the main RAM 74 is “1” or “2” and the index value IV = 4 in this game, the player has been elected (steps S2501 and S2502: YES) While reading out the value (step S2503), the dummy notification table is read out from the main ROM 73 (step S2504). Then, a dummy notification lottery process is executed (step S2505). In the dummy notification lottery process, the main RAM 74 reads the value of the lottery counter periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) and the value of the read lottery counter is set to the current setting value in the read dummy notification table. Match against the corresponding information group.

  When the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process (step S2506: YES), the setting process of the second display data is executed (step S2507). In the setting process of the second display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, the type of data of display contents corresponding to the winning with the index value IV = 4 is grasped. Then, data of display content of the recognized type is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and display control of the special display unit 100 is executed according to the read data of the display content. As a result, the display corresponding to the winning with index value IV = 4 is started on the special display unit 100.

  Thereafter, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect MPU 82 (step S2508). Only one type of notification execution command is set as described above, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. As for the stop order command, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R selected in the current dummy notification lottery process is read out from the main ROM 73 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S2508 are sent to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). Incidentally, in the stop order command transmitted in this case, information of the stop order corresponding to the notification content of the special display unit 100 selected in step S2505 is set.

  Next, the relationship between the addition mode of the number of continued games in the ART state and the setting value, and the relationship between the execution mode of dummy notification and the setting value will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the addition mode of the number of continued games in the ART state and the setting value, and FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the index value IV in the non-BB state, which triggers execution of the additional lottery process for the number of continued games in the ART state, is any one of "1", "2" and "3". . The winning probability in the lottery process (FIG. 10) of the combination of these index values IV = 1 to 3 is mutually the same. Further, the winning probability in the lottery process (FIG. 10) of the combination of index values IV = 1 to 3 is common to all settings. Specifically, the point value PV set to each of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is “10000” in all set values. Thus, in the non-AT state, the probability that the bell winning will be established is the same regardless of which one of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R is selected as the first stop. Each winning of 1 to 3 will occur equally.

  Further, the probability of winning in addition in the additional lottery processing executed upon being won by index value IV = 1 to 3 is also mutually the same, and the probability of winning is all set. It is common. Specifically, the probability of winning in the additional drawing in the additional drawing process executed with the index value IV = 1 to 3 being elected is 1/10 in all set values. There is. As described above, since the winning probability of each of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is also the same, the probability of winning to any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 and becoming an additional winning in the additional lottery process is mutual Will be identical to In addition, since both the winning probability of index value IV = 1 to 3 and the probability of winning with additional winning in the additional drawing process are common to all settings, the probability of occurrence of addition of the number of continued games in ART state is common to all settings. is there. Furthermore, the number of games to be added in the case of an additional winning in the additional lottery process is also common to all settings. As a result, the expected value of the number of continued games added in the ART state is also common to all settings. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an advantage or a disadvantage between settings with respect to the addition of the number of continued games in the ART state.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the probability of winning to any of index values IV = 1 to 3 and being additionally winning in additional lottery processing is mutually the same, and the probability is the same for all set values. In the ART preparation state or ART state, when an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, the dummy notification is executed by the image display device 63. The dummy notification indicates that the left reel 32L is to be stopped for the first time when the index value IV = 4 that the bell winning will be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. One of the notification, the notification for instructing the first stop of the middle reel 32M, and the notification for instructing the first stop of the right reel 32R to be executed is executed.

  The image for executing the dummy notification instructing the first reel 32L to stop first is the first left reel 32L to enable the establishment of the bell winning when the index value IV = 1 is won. It is the same as the image for executing the notification instructing to stop. In addition, the image for executing the dummy notification instructing to stop the middle reel 32M first makes the middle reel 32M possible to enable the formation of the bell winning when the index value IV = 2 is won. It is the same as the image for executing the notification instructing the first stop. Further, the image for executing the dummy notification instructing the first reel 32R to stop first is the right reel 32R in order to enable the formation of the bell winning when the index value IV = 3 is won. It is the same as the image for executing the notification instructing the first stop. By executing the dummy notification as described above, the probability of winning to any of index values IV = 1 to 3 as described above and further winning with additional lottery processing is the same as each other, and In a configuration in which the probability is the same for all setting values, the frequency at which the number of continued games in the ART state is generated when any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified as the first stop and the bell winning is established. It becomes possible to make it change suitably.

  The relationship between the execution mode of the dummy notification and the set value will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 57 (b).

  The probability of winning with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is different among the settings of “1” to “6”. Specifically, when the set value is “1”, the point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to “7000”, and when the set value is “2”, the index value IV = 4 When the point value PV is set to "8000" and the set value is "3", the point value PV with index value IV = 4 is set to "9000" and the set value is "4" The point value PV of index value IV = 4 is set to “10000” and the point value PV of index value IV = 4 is set to “11000” when the setting value is “5”. When the setting value is “6”, the point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to “12000”. As a result, the larger the setting value, the higher the probability that the index value IV = 4 will be won in the non-BB state.

  The probability that the dummy notification is executed when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is selected is common to all settings, but the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R selected as the dummy notification is selected The aspect is different between the settings of “1” to “6”. Specifically, when the set value is “1”, the probability that the dummy notification is won when the index value IV = 4 is won is 3/5, and the left reel 32L is firstly selected as the dummy notification. The probability that the notification to stop is performed, the probability that the notification to stop the middle reel 32M as the first notification is performed as the dummy notification, and the probability that the notification to cause the first reel 32R to stop the first as the dummy notification are the same. It is 1/5. When the set value is "2", the probability of being a dummy notification winning when the index value IV = 4 is won is 3/5, and when the dummy notification is won, the left reel as a dummy notification Only the notification for stopping the first 32L is executed, and the notification for stopping the middle reel 32M for the first and the notification for stopping the right reel 32R for the first are not executed as the dummy notification. When the set value is “3”, the probability of being a dummy notification winning when the index value IV = 4 is won is 3/5, and when the dummy notification is won, the middle reel as a dummy notification Only the notification for stopping the first 32M is executed, and the notification for stopping the left reel 32L for the first and the notification for stopping the right reel 32R for the first are not executed as the dummy notification. When the set value is “4”, the probability of being a dummy notification winning when the index value IV = 4 is won is 3/5, and when the dummy notification is won, the right reel as a dummy notification Only the notification for stopping the first 32R is executed, and the notification for stopping the left reel 32L for the first and the notification for stopping the middle reel 32M for the first are not executed as the dummy notification. When the set value is “5”, the probability of being a dummy notification winning when the index value IV = 4 is won is 3/5, and when the dummy notification is won, the left reel as a dummy notification The probability that notification to cause 32L to stop first and the probability that notification to cause middle reel 32M to stop first as dummy notification are 3/10 identical to each other, and the right reel 32R is The notification to stop is not executed as a dummy notification. When the set value is "6", the probability of being a dummy notification winning when the index value IV = 4 is won is 3/5, and when the dummy notification is won, the middle reel as a dummy notification The probability that notification to cause 32M to stop first and the probability that notification to cause first reel 32R to stop first as dummy notification are 3/10 identical to each other. The notification to stop is not executed as a dummy notification.

  In the configuration in which the probability of winning to index value IV = 1 to 3 and being additionally winning in additional lottery processing is mutually the same, and the probability is the same for all setting values When the dummy notification is executed when the index value IV = 4 which does not become a trigger is issued, notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which is easily selected as the dummy notification, occurs and bell winning occurs. The frequency of occurrence of the addition in the case will be reduced. That is, when the set value is “1”, the probability of being selected as the dummy notification is mutually the same in the three stop orders, so the frequency of occurrence of the addition triggered by the establishment of the bell winning is the reel It becomes the same among the stop order of 32L, 32M and 32R. Further, when the set value is "2", only notification to cause the left reel 32L to be first stopped is executed as a dummy notification, so the frequency of occurrence of the addition triggered by the establishment of the bell winning is the left reel 32L. Only the stop order to lower the first will be lower. Further, when the set value is "3", only the notification for stopping the middle reel 32M for the first time is executed as the dummy notification, so the frequency of occurrence of the addition when the bell winning is established is the middle reel 32M. Only the stop order to lower the first will be lower. Further, when the set value is "4", only notification for stopping the right reel 32R as the first notification is executed as a dummy notification, so the frequency of occurrence of the addition triggered by the establishment of the bell winning is the right reel 32R. Only the stop order to lower the first will be lower. Further, when the setting value is "5", the notification for stopping the right reel 32R as the first notification as the dummy notification is not executed, so the frequency of occurrence of the addition triggered by the establishment of the bell winning is the right reel 32R. Only the stop order to stop 1 goes high. Further, when the set value is "6", the notification for stopping the left reel 32L for the first time as the dummy notification is not executed, so the frequency of occurrence of the addition triggered by the establishment of the bell winning is the left reel 32L. Only the stop order to stop 1 goes high.

  With the above configuration, the probability of winning to any of index values IV = 1 to 3 and being additionally winning in the additional lottery process is mutually the same, and the probability is the same for all set values. Even if it has a certain configuration, the occurrence of the bell winning is triggered by the fact that the bell winning combination is established because the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which causes the frequency of occurrence of the addition to decrease, is different between the set values. By grasping the frequency of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the case, the player can predict the set value.

  In the configuration in which the dummy notification is executed by the image display device 63 when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, the dummy is selected when the index value IV = 4 in the special display unit 100 A notification corresponding to the winning with the index value IV = 4 is executed regardless of the type of notification. As a result, the manager of the game hall can grasp the presence or absence of the execution of the dummy notification by checking the special display unit 100. In particular, since the special display unit 100 is directly controlled by the main MPU 72, the reliability of the display can be enhanced.

  Further, as described above, when the special display unit 100 is elected with the index value IV = 4, the notification corresponding to the selection with the index value IV = 4 is executed regardless of the type of the dummy notification. In any case, the special display unit 100 is present at a position where the display range is narrower than the image display device 63 and the position is less noticeable than the image display device 63. That is, the special display unit 100 has a player's attention level lower than that of the image display device 63. As a result, even if the display as described above is performed on the special display unit 100, it is possible to prevent the gaming property already described from being impaired.

<Another form of the ninth embodiment>
-In a configuration in which a benefit other than the addition of the number of continuing games in ART state can be provided upon being elected to any of index values IV = 1 to 3 in non-BB state, against such a structure The characteristic configuration of the ninth embodiment may be applied. Another benefit is, for example, transition to an advantageous state in which an advantageous situation for the player continues over a predetermined number of games, triggered by having won any index value IV = 1 to 3 in non-BB state in AT state. In the configuration, the characteristic configuration of the ninth embodiment may be applied.

  -When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is a predetermined mode, the type of combination in which the bell winning is achieved is not the three types of index value IV = 1 to 3, but the reel 32L which becomes the first stop and the second stop , 32M, 32R may be set to the same six types as the maximum number of patterns. That is, a pattern in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the middle reel 32M, a pattern in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is The pattern is the middle reel 32M and the second stop is the left reel 32L, the pattern the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the right reel 32R A combination may be set corresponding to each of the pattern in which the second stop is the left reel 32L and the pattern in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop is the middle reel 32M. In this case, when the dummy notification is won when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, any of the above six patterns is notified as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Become.

  -When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is a predetermined mode, the type of combination in which the bell prize is established is not three types of index value IV = 1 to 3, but taken as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R The same nine types as the maximum number of patterns to be obtained may be set. That is, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the remaining is the arbitrary pattern, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the remaining is the arbitrary pattern, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the remaining is the arbitrary pattern, The pattern in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the middle reel 32M, the pattern in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel A pattern of 32M and a second stop of the left reel 32L, a pattern of a first stop of the middle reel 32M and a second stop of the right reel 32R, and a first stop of the right reel 32R and a second It corresponds to the pattern where the stop is the left reel 32L and the pattern where the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop is the middle reel 32M. That role may be configured to have been set. In this case, when the dummy notification is won when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, any of the above nine patterns is notified as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Become.

  -The probability that the dummy notification is won when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is not limited to the configuration in which the setting values of "1" to "6" are the same, and "1" It is good also as composition which is different in the setting value of-"6". For example, the larger the set value, the higher the probability that the dummy notification will be won, or the smaller the set value, the lower the probability that the dummy notification will be won. In addition, the group with the smaller set value (set values of "1", "2" and "3") and the group with the larger set value (set values of "4", "5" and "6") In this case, the probability of becoming a dummy notification winning may be different. Further, the probability that the dummy notification will be won may be different between the even setting value and the odd setting value.

  The probability of winning with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is not limited to a configuration in which the larger the set value is, the higher the probability of winning will be. Further, the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state may be the same or substantially the same among the setting values of “1” to “6”. Even in this case, the types of stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R notified or easy to be notified when the dummy notification is won are different according to the set value, so that the reels 32L, 32M, It is possible for the player to predict the set value from the occurrence frequency of the addition when the stop order of 32R is informed and the bell winning is established.

  The additional lottery process may be executed even when the player is elected with any of the index values IV = 5 to 7. This makes it possible to give an opportunity to generate an increase in the number of continuing games even when the bell winning is not established.

  When the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, the dummy notification is selected in the processing for dummy notification (FIG. 56), and the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R There is no limitation to the configuration in which the display corresponding to the index value IV = 4 is performed in the special display unit 100 only in the case, and the reel 32L, when winning with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state. Regardless of whether or not the stop order of 32M and 32R is notified by the image display device 63, the special display unit 100 may be configured to perform display corresponding to the index value IV = 4.

  The special display unit 100 may be provided in a display unit for notifying other information such as the credit display unit 65 or the number-of-grants display unit 66. For example, a section frame section in which the target display section which is one of the credit display section 65 and the number-of-grants display section 66 divides the outer edge of the target display section In the configuration including the units, the special display unit 100 may be disposed at a position adjacent to the notification light emitting unit in the area partitioned by the division frame of the target display unit. In this case, the player's attention to the special display unit 100 can be reduced.

  The special display unit 100 may be used as a display unit for notifying other information such as the credit display unit 65 or the number-of-grants display unit 66. In this case, the player's attention to the special display unit 100 can be reduced.

  Set unit display sections as many as the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R affecting the winning result in the special display section 100, and correspond to the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R in each unit display section It may be configured to execute display. In this case, in the special display unit 100 as well as the image display device 63, a notification is made that enables the player to clearly grasp the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  The device for executing notification of the stop mode by the control of the effect side MPU 82 is not limited to the image display device 63, and may be used to notify the stop mode instead of or in addition to the image display device 63. The notification of the stop mode may be executed by the dedicated light emitting unit being controlled by the effect MPU 82, or the notification of the stop aspect may be executed by the speaker 62 being controlled by the effect MPU 82 .

  -In the case where the index value IV = 1 to 3 is won, the bell prize is established when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is a predetermined stop order, but either reel 32L , 32M, and 32R may be configured to hold the bell winning when the stop operation timing is a predetermined stop operation timing. That is, for example, when the stop operation timing of the left reel 32L is the first stop operation timing when the index value IV = 1 is won, the bell winning is established while the bell operation timing is not the first stop operation timing. Winning is not established. Further, when the index value IV = 2 is won, for example, when the stop operation timing of the left reel 32L is the second stop operation timing, the bell winning is realized, while when it is not the second stop operation timing, the bell is won Winning is not established. Further, when the index value IV = 3 is won, for example, when the stop operation timing of the left reel 32L is the third stop operation timing, the bell winning is realized, while when it is not the third stop operation timing, the bell is won Winning is not established. In this case, in the AT state, when an index value IV = 1 to 3 is won, a stop operation timing is notified that enables establishment of a bell winning corresponding to the index value that has been won. When the dummy notification is selected when the index value IV = 4, the first to third stop operation timings are notified. However, when the index value IV = 4 is won, the bell winning will be established regardless of the stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  -It is not limited to the composition which makes setting value prediction possible by the execution mode of dummy information, and it is good also as composition which enables prediction of the degree of advantage other than setting value by the execution mode of dummy information. For example, in the configuration in which the high probability mode and the low probability mode exist as in the second embodiment, the execution mode of the dummy notification in the high probability mode and the low probability mode is the same as in the ninth embodiment. By making this different, the player may be made to predict which one of the high probability mode and the low probability mode is from the execution mode of the dummy notification.

Tenth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and the configuration of the dummy notification table are different from those of the ninth embodiment. The configuration different from the ninth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the execution mode of the dummy notification and the set value.

  The probability of winning with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is common to all settings unlike the ninth embodiment. Specifically, the point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to "9000" regardless of the setting value of "1" to "6". The point value PV is lower than the point value PV (specifically, “10000”) set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 3 in the non-BB state. Therefore, the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 is lower than the probability of winning with index value IV = 1 to 3 regardless of the setting value of “1” to “6”. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the probability of winning with index value IV = 4 is any of the probability of winning index value IV = 1 to 3 regardless of the setting value of “1” to “6”. It may be a higher probability or the same probability.

  The probability that the dummy notification is executed when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is selected is different among the setting values of “1” to “6”. Specifically, when the set value is “1”, when the index value IV = 4 is won, the probability that the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process is 1/2, and the set value is “1. If it is 2 ", the probability that the dummy notification will be won in the dummy notification lottery process is 1/2 when the index value IV = 4, and if the set value is" 3 ", the index In the case of winning with the value IV = 4, the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 2/3, and when the set value is “4”, the index value IV = 4 is won. In this case, the probability that the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process is 2/3, and when the set value is “5”, the dummy notification lottery process is performed when the index value IV = 4 is won. Dummy The probability of becoming a knowledge winning is 4/5, and when the setting value is “6”, the probability of becoming a dummy notification winning in the dummy notification lottery process when the index value IV = 4 is won is 6 / 7 That is, when the index value IV = 4 is won, the probability that the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process becomes higher as the set value is larger. Therefore, the larger the set value, the lower the probability that the bell winning will occur under the condition that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is informed in the image display device 63 and the addition of the number of continued games in ART state . Thus, the player can know the frequency at which the bell winning is generated and the number of continued games in the ART state is generated under the situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63. Can predict the set value.

  The selection ratio between the stop orders of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R selected as the dummy notification in each set value is the same as that in the ninth embodiment.

<Another form of the tenth embodiment>
The probability of winning with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is not limited to the same configuration among the setting values of “1” to “6”, and may be substantially the same. Further, the probability of winning with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state may increase as the set value increases, or may decrease as the set value increases.

Eleventh Embodiment
The present embodiment is different from the ninth embodiment in that the additional lottery processing for the number of continued games in the ART state is executed. The configuration different from the ninth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the process for adding.

  In the processing for addition, when the winning is made with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state (step S2601: YES), the addition lottery processing is executed (step S2602). In the additional lottery process, the additional lottery table is read from the main ROM 73, and the main RAM 74 reads the value of the lottery counter periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) and the value of the lottery counter is read. Match against the table. The contents of the additional lottery table will be described later. If it is determined in the additional lottery process that the additional prize is won (step S2603: YES), "50" is added as the number of additional games to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2604). As a result, the number of continued games in the ART state is increased.

  Next, the relationship between the addition mode of the number of continued games in the ART state and the setting value, and the relationship between the execution mode of dummy notification and the setting value will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the addition mode of the number of continued games in the ART state and the setting value, and FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (a), the index value IV in the non-BB state, which is the trigger for execution of the additional lottery process for the number of continued games in the ART state, is “4”. That is, in the present embodiment, the index value IV = 4 at which the bell winning is established regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the execution trigger of the additional drawing process, and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is predetermined. The index values IV = 1 to 3 at which the bell winning is established when the stop order is reached do not become an execution trigger of the additional lottery process. Further, the winning probability of the index value IV = 4 is common to all settings. Specifically, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is “9000” in all settings. Further, the probability of winning in addition in the additional lottery processing executed with the index value IV = 4 being elected is also common to all settings. Specifically, the probability of winning in the additional lottery process is 1/2 in all settings. As a result, the probability of the occurrence of the addition of the number of continued games in the ART state is common to all settings. Furthermore, since the number of games to be added in the case of the additional winning in the additional drawing process is also common to all settings, the expected value of the number of continuous games to be added in the ART state is also common to all settings. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an advantage or a disadvantage between settings with respect to the addition of the number of continued games in the ART state.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state results in winning, the probability that the dummy notification is executed differs among the setting values of "1" to "6". There is. Specifically, when the set value is “1”, when the index value IV = 4 is won, the probability that the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process is 1/3, and the set value is If it is "2", the probability that the dummy notification will be won in the dummy notification lottery process is 1/2 when the index value IV = 4 and the setting value is "3". When the index value IV = 4 is won, the probability that the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process is 2/3, and when the set value is “4”, the index value IV = 4 is elected. In the case of a dummy notification lottery process, the probability that the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process is 4/5, and when the set value is “5”, the dummy notification lottery process when the index value IV = 4 is won. Dami at Not become a notification winning, the probability of dummy alarm winning at dummy informing lottery processing in a case that became a winner in the index value IV = 4 when the set value is "6" is 6/7. That is, the probability that the dummy notification will be won in the dummy notification lottery process when the index value IV is won is higher as the setting value is larger except in the case where the setting value is “5”. Therefore, except in the case of the setting value of “5”, bell winning occurs under the situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, and the number of continued games in ART state is increased. The probability of occurrence increases as the set value increases. As a result, the player recognizes the frequency at which the bell winning is generated and the number of continuous games in the ART state is generated under the situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63. It becomes possible to predict the set value.

  In the setting value of “5”, the dummy notification is not executed when the index value IV = 4 is won. Therefore, when the bell display occurs under the condition that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, there is no event that the number of continuing games in ART state is added. There is a high possibility that the set value is "5". Thus, the player pays attention to the fact that the number of continued games in the ART state is added upon occurrence of the bell winning under a situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified in the image display device 63. It is possible to increase the degree.

  In the configuration in which the dummy notification is performed at setting values other than “5”, the execution modes of the dummy notification are different among the setting values of “1” to “4” and “6”. Specifically, when the set value is “1”, the probability that the dummy notification is won when the index value IV = 4 is won is 1/3, and the left reel 32L is firstly selected as the dummy notification. The probability that the notification to stop is performed and the probability that the notification to stop the middle reel 32M as the first notification as the dummy notification is 1/6 are identical to each other, and the notification to stop the right reel 32R first is It is not executed as a dummy notification. When the set value is “2”, the probability of being a dummy notification winning when the index value IV = 4 is won is 1/2, and when the dummy notification is winning, the left reel as a dummy notification Only the notification for stopping the first 32L is executed, and the notification for stopping the middle reel 32M for the first and the notification for stopping the right reel 32R for the first are not executed as the dummy notification. When the set value is “3”, the probability of being a dummy notification winning when the index value IV = 4 is won is 2/3, and when the dummy notification is won, the middle reel as a dummy notification Only the notification for stopping the first 32M is executed, and the notification for stopping the left reel 32L for the first and the notification for stopping the right reel 32R for the first are not executed as the dummy notification. When the set value is “4”, the probability of being elected as a dummy notification is 4/5 when the index value IV = 4 and the notification is made that the left reel 32L is first stopped as a dummy notification. The probability of being made and the probability of being made to perform the first stop of the middle reel 32M as the dummy notification are 2/5 identical to each other, and the making the first stop of the right reel 32R is not performed as the dummy notification . When the set value is "6", the probability of being a dummy notification winning when the index value IV = 4 is won is 6/7, and when the dummy notification is won, the right reel as a dummy notification Only the notification for stopping the first 32R is executed, and the notification for stopping the left reel 32L for the first and the notification for stopping the middle reel 32M for the first are not executed as the dummy notification.

  Due to the above configuration, the notification for causing the left reel 32L to first stop as the dummy notification and the middle reel 32M as the dummy notification when the index value IV = 4 is won in the setting value of “1” or the setting value of “4” Only the notification to cause the first stop is performed. Therefore, when the bell winning occurs under the condition that the notification for stopping the left reel 32L for the first stop and the notification for stopping the middle reel 32M for the first stop in the image display device 63, the number of continued games in ART state is added. When an event occurs, but a bell prize occurs under the condition that the right reel 32R is stopped for the first stop in the image display device 63, there is no event that the number of continued games in the ART state is increased. The possibility that the set value is "1" or "4" is high.

  In the setting value of “2”, only notification that causes the left reel 32L to first stop is performed as a dummy notification when the index value IV = 4 is won. Therefore, when a bell prize occurs under the condition that the left reel 32L is stopped at the first stop in the image display device 63, an event occurs in which the number of continued games in the ART state is added. In the event that a bell prize occurs under a situation in which a notification to stop the middle reel 32M first and a notification to stop the right reel 32R first are executed, there is no event that the number of continuing games in ART state is added. The possibility that the set value is "2" is high.

  With the setting value of “3”, only notification that causes the middle reel 32M to first stop is performed as a dummy notification when the index value IV = 4 is won. Therefore, when a bell prize occurs under the condition that the middle reel 32M is stopped at the first stop in the image display device 63, an event occurs in which the number of continued games in the ART state is added. In the event that a bell prize occurs under the condition that the left reel 32L is stopped for the first stop and the right reel 32R is stopped for the first stop, there is no event that the number of continuing games in ART state is added. The possibility that the set value is "3" is high.

  With the setting value of "6", only notification that causes the right reel 32R to first stop is performed as a dummy notification when the index value IV = 4 is won. Therefore, when a bell prize occurs under the condition that the right reel 32R is stopped for the first stop in the image display device 63, an event occurs in which the number of continuing games in the ART state is added. In the event that a bell prize occurs under the condition that the left reel 32L is firstly stopped and the middle reel 32M is firstly stopped, the event that the number of continuing games in ART state is not generated does not occur. The possibility that the set value is "6" is high.

  In particular, an event in which a notification to cause the right reel 32R to be first stopped as a dummy notification occurs only when the set value is "6". Then, when a bell prize occurs under the condition that the right reel 32R is stopped at the first stop in the image display device 63, there is an event that the number of continuing games in the ART state is added. It is determined that the set value is "6". As a result, when a bell prize occurs under the condition that the right reel 32R is stopped at the first stop in the image display device 63, the player can prevent the occurrence of the event that the number of continuing games in ART state is added It is possible to increase the degree of attention.

  Here, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 61, in the case of the present embodiment, the stop order when the right reel 32R is stopped for the first and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for the second stop and the third stop are arbitrary. The display of the special display unit 100 in the is "6". That is, when the index value IV = 3 is won in the AT state and the stop order to stop the right reel 32 R in the image display device 63 is notified, “6” is displayed on the special display unit 100. Become. The number “6” is an event that the number of continued games in the ART state is added when a bell prize occurs under the condition that the right reel 32R is first stopped in the image display device 63. It corresponds to "6" which is the value of the setting value that may occur. Thus, the player who confirms the display on the special display unit 100 when the bell display is realized when the stop order for stopping the right reel 32R firstly is notified in the image display device 63 is confirmed in the image display device 63 thereafter. Recognizes that the setting value is "6" by confirming the event that the number of continued games in ART state is added when a bell prize occurs under a situation where a notification to stop the right reel 32R is performed first is executed It becomes possible.

  On the other hand, when the index value IV = 4 and the dummy notification is executed, “H” is displayed on the special display unit 100 regardless of the type of the dummy notification. As a result, the bell display is generated under the situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63 and the special display unit 100 is confirmed in the game in which the number of continued games in ART state is generated. Also, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp the set value.

  Further, when the index value IV = 3 is won, in the case of the AT state, the notification for stopping the right reel 32R at the first position is executed in the image display device 63, but it is assumed that the bell winning is realized. There is no event that the number of continuing games in ART state is added. As a result, even if a notification for stopping the right reel 32R in the image display device 63 is executed first and a bell winning is generated, it is possible to cause a situation where the number of continued games in ART state is not executed. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the notification that the first reel 32R is stopped on the display device 63 is executed.

<Another form of the eleventh embodiment>
-In the configuration in which a benefit other than the addition of the number of continued games in ART state can be provided upon the index value IV = 4 in non-BB state being won, the eleventh embodiment is carried out for such a structure. The characteristic configuration of the form may be applied. As another benefit, for example, in the configuration in which the advantageous status for the player continues over the predetermined number of games upon transition to the advantageous status, which is triggered by the index value IV = 4 in non-BB status being won in AT status. The characteristic configuration of the eleventh embodiment may be applied.

  -When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is a predetermined mode, the type of combination in which the bell winning is achieved is not the three types of index value IV = 1 to 3, but the reel 32L which becomes the first stop and the second stop , 32M, 32R may be set to the same six types as the maximum number of patterns. That is, a pattern in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the middle reel 32M, a pattern in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is The pattern is the middle reel 32M and the second stop is the left reel 32L, the pattern the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the right reel 32R A combination may be set corresponding to each of the pattern in which the second stop is the left reel 32L and the pattern in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop is the middle reel 32M.

  In this case, when the dummy notification is won when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, one of the six patterns is notified as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It becomes. Moreover, in the said structure, the number of types of stop order of reel 32L, 32M, 32R alert | reported when bell winning is realized becomes more than the number of types of the setting value of "1"-"6". Therefore, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be notified when the dummy notification is won may be different for each of the set values “1” to “6”. In this case, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is informed and the bell winning is established, if the addition of the number of continuing games occurs, the kind of stop order of the informed reels 32L, 32M, 32R It becomes possible to uniquely identify the set value. Further, in this configuration, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the set values when the reel 32L, 32M, 32R comes to a predetermined winning order when the winning combination is won. When the stop order of is notified by the image display device 63, the special display unit 100 may display a number corresponding to the setting value.

  -When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is a predetermined mode, the type of combination in which the bell prize is established is not three types of index value IV = 1 to 3, but taken as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R The same nine types as the maximum number of patterns to be obtained may be set. That is, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the remaining is the arbitrary pattern, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the remaining is the arbitrary pattern, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the remaining is the arbitrary pattern, The pattern in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the middle reel 32M, the pattern in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel A pattern of 32M and a second stop of the left reel 32L, a pattern of a first stop of the middle reel 32M and a second stop of the right reel 32R, and a first stop of the right reel 32R and a second It corresponds to the pattern where the stop is the left reel 32L and the pattern where the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop is the middle reel 32M. That role may be configured to have been set. In this case, when the dummy notification is won when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, any of the above nine patterns is notified as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Become.

  In this case, when the dummy notification is won when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, one of the nine patterns is notified as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It becomes. Moreover, in the said structure, the number of types of stop order of reel 32L, 32M, 32R alert | reported when bell winning is realized becomes more than the number of types of the setting value of "1"-"6". Therefore, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be notified when the dummy notification is won may be different for each of the set values “1” to “6”. In this case, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is informed and the bell winning is established, if the addition of the number of continuing games occurs, the kind of stop order of the informed reels 32L, 32M, 32R It becomes possible to uniquely identify the set value. Further, in this configuration, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the set values when the reel 32L, 32M, 32R comes to a predetermined winning order when the winning combination is won. When the stop order of is notified by the image display device 63, the special display unit 100 may display a number corresponding to the setting value.

  The probability that the dummy notification is won when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is not limited to the configuration different in the setting value of “1” to “6”, and “1” to “6”. The configuration may be the same or substantially the same with the setting value of 6 ′ ′. In this case, the probability that the dummy notification will not be won when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is the same or substantially the same for the setting values of “1” to “6”, so the reels 32L, 32M, Even if the bell winning combination is established without notification of the stop order of 32R and the frequency of occurrence of the addition of the number of continuing games is grasped, the set value can not be predicted. Therefore, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is informed and the bell winning is established, the player is placed in the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which became the notification target when the addition of the number of continuing games occurs. It is possible to make

  In the case of winning with index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, the probability that the dummy notification will be won may decrease as the setting value increases. In addition, the group with the smaller set value (set values of "1", "2" and "3") and the group with the larger set value (set values of "4", "5" and "6") In this case, the probability of becoming a dummy notification winning may be different. Further, the probability that the dummy notification will be won may be different between the even setting value and the odd setting value.

  The additional lottery process may be executed even when the player is elected with any of the index values IV = 5 to 7. This makes it possible to give an opportunity to generate an increase in the number of continuing games even when the bell winning is not established.

  A configuration may be applied that enables prediction of a set value using dummy notification with respect to an index value IV in which a combination of symbols stopped and displayed when winning is achieved does not overlap with another index value IV. For example, in a configuration in which a bell prize is established only when a predetermined index value IV is won, a dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process executed when the predetermined index value IV is won. The notification may be executed. In this case, in the dummy notification, while the predetermined stop order is a notification target at a predetermined set value, the bell stop is established by preventing the predetermined stop order from being a notification target at a specific set value. It is possible to predict the set value from the type of the dummy notification of.

Twelfth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the timing at which the dummy notification lottery process is executed is different from that of the above-described eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the above-described eleventh embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the processing for addition.

  In the processing for addition, when the winning is made with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state (step S2701: YES), the addition lottery processing is executed (step S2702). In the additional lottery process, the additional lottery table is read from the main ROM 73, and the main RAM 74 reads the value of the lottery counter periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) and the value of the lottery counter is read. Match against the table. The contents of the additional lottery table are the same as those of the eleventh embodiment. If the addition lottery is achieved in the addition lottery process (step S2703: YES), "50" is added as the number of addition games to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2704). As a result, the number of continued games in the ART state is increased.

  If the addition lottery is not successful in the addition lottery process (step S2703: NO), the current setting value is read (step S2705), and the dummy notification table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2706). Then, a dummy notification lottery process is executed (step S2707). In the dummy notification lottery process, the main RAM 74 reads the value of the lottery counter periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) and the value of the read lottery counter is set to the current setting value in the read dummy notification table. Match against the corresponding information group.

  When the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process (step S2708: YES), the setting process of the second display data is executed (step S2709). In the setting process of the second display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, the type of data of display contents corresponding to the winning with the index value IV = 4 is grasped. Then, data of display content of the recognized type is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and display control of the special display unit 100 is executed according to the read data of the display content. As a result, the display corresponding to the winning with index value IV = 4 is started on the special display unit 100.

  Thereafter, a notification execution command and a stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect MPU 82 (step S 2710). Only one type of notification execution command is set as described above, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. As for the stop order command, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R selected in the current dummy notification lottery process is read out from the main ROM 73 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S2710 are sent to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). Incidentally, in the stop order command transmitted in this case, information of the stop order corresponding to the notification content of the special display unit 100 selected in step S2707 is set.

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory view for explaining a dummy notification table.

  In the present embodiment, as already described, the dummy notification lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won and the additional lottery process does not result in the winning. In this case, the probability that the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process is higher as the set value is larger. On the other hand, in each setting value, a notification instructing the first reel 32L to stop first, a notification instructing the first reel 32M to stop first, and a notification instructing the first reel 32R to stop first Mutual selection rates are the same. Specifically, when the set value is “1”, the probability that the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process is 3/10, and the notification to make the left reel 32L first stop is executed as the dummy notification. The probability, the probability that the notification to cause the middle reel 32M to be stopped first as the dummy notification, and the probability that the notification to cause the right reel 32R to be stopped the first as the dummy notification are 1/10 the same as each other . When the setting value is "2", the probability that the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process is 1/3, and the probability that the notification to cause the left reel 32L to first stop as the dummy notification is executed, the dummy notification The probability that the notification to stop the middle reel 32M for the first stop is performed, and the probability that the notification to stop the right reel 32R for the first stop as the dummy notification are mutually the same 1/9. When the setting value is "3", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 3/7, and the probability that the notification for stopping the left reel 32L as the first notification is executed as the dummy notification, as the dummy notification The probability that the notification to stop the middle reel 32M for the first stop is performed, and the probability that the notification to stop the right reel 32R for the first stop as the dummy notification are the same 1/7. When the setting value is "4", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 3/5, and the probability that the notification to cause the left reel 32L to first stop as the dummy notification is executed, and the dummy notification The probability that the notification to stop the middle reel 32M for the first stop is performed, and the probability that the notification to stop the right reel 32R for the first stop as the dummy notification is the same 1/5. When the setting value is "5", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 3/4, and the probability that the notification to cause the left reel 32L to first stop as the dummy notification is executed, and the dummy notification The probability that the notification to stop the middle reel 32M for the first stop is performed, and the probability that the notification to stop the right reel 32R for the first stop as the dummy notification are the same 1/4. When the setting value is "6", the probability that the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process is 1/1, and the probability that the notification to cause the left reel 32L to first stop as the dummy notification is executed, the dummy notification The probability that the notification to stop the middle reel 32M for the first stop is performed, and the probability that the notification to stop the right reel 32R for the first stop as the dummy notification are the same 1/3.

  With the above configuration, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, and the frequency with which the bell winning is established becomes higher as the set value becomes larger. As a result, the player can predict the set value by notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63 and grasping the frequency at which the bell winning is established.

Twelfth Embodiment
The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the probability of becoming a dummy notification winning increases as the setting value increases, and may be configured such that the probability of becoming a dummy notification winning decreases as the setting value increases. In addition, groups with smaller set values (set values of "1", "2" and "3") and groups with larger set values (set values of "4", "5" and "6") The probability of becoming a dummy notification win may be different. Further, the probability that the dummy notification will be won may be different between the even setting value and the odd setting value.

The thirteenth embodiment
In the present embodiment, an execution trigger of the additional lottery process and a trigger of executing the dummy notification lottery process are different from the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the above-described eleventh embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the processing for addition.

  In the additional processing, when the player is elected with any of the index values IV = 1 to 4 in the non-BB state (step S2801: YES), the additional lottery processing is executed (step S2802). In the additional lottery process, the additional lottery table is read from the main ROM 73, and the main RAM 74 reads the value of the lottery counter periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) and the value of the lottery counter is read. Match against the table. The contents of the additional lottery table will be described later. If the addition lottery is achieved in the addition lottery process (step S2803: YES), “50” is added as the number of addition games to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2804). As a result, the number of continued games in the ART state is increased.

  In addition, in the case where the winning is added in the additional lottery process, it is possible to execute the dummy notification on condition that the index value IV = 4 in the current game has been won (step S2805: YES) Execute processing for Specifically, the current setting value is read (step S2806), and the dummy notification table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2807). Then, a dummy notification lottery process is executed (step S2808). In the dummy notification lottery process, the main RAM 74 reads the value of the lottery counter periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) and the value of the read lottery counter is set to the current setting value in the read dummy notification table. Match against the corresponding information group.

  When the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process (step S2809: YES), the setting process of the second display data is executed (step S2810). In the setting process of the second display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, the type of data of display contents corresponding to the winning with the index value IV = 4 is grasped. Then, data of display content of the recognized type is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and display control of the special display unit 100 is executed according to the read data of the display content. As a result, the display corresponding to the winning with index value IV = 4 is started on the special display unit 100.

  Thereafter, a notification execution command and a stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect MPU 82 (step S2811). Only one type of notification execution command is set as described above, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. As for the stop order command, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R selected in the current dummy notification lottery process is read out from the main ROM 73 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S2811 are transmitted to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). Incidentally, in the stop order command transmitted in this case, the information of the stop order corresponding to the notification contents of the special display unit 100 selected in step S2808 is set.

  FIG. 65 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the addition mode of the number of continued games in the ART state and the setting value.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the index value IV in the non-BB state, which is an opportunity to execute the additional lottery process for the number of continued games in the ART state, is any one of "1" to "4". The winning probabilities of the index values IV = 1 to 3 are mutually equal, and the winning probability of the index value IV = 4 is lower than the winning probability of the index value IV = 4. Further, the winning probability of these index values IV = 1 to 4 is common to all settings. Specifically, the point value PV set to each of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is “10000” in all set values. Thus, in the non-AT state, the probability that the bell winning will be established is the same regardless of which one of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R is selected as the first stop. Each winning of 1 to 3 will occur equally. Further, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is "9000" in all set values.

  It is assumed that the odds of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process executed upon being won by one of index values IV = 1 to 3 are also mutually the same, and the winning probability is common to all settings. It has become. Specifically, the probability of winning in the additional lottery process in the additional lottery process executed upon being won by the index value IV = 1 to 3 is 1/10 in all settings. . As described above, since the winning probability of each of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is also the same, the probability of winning to any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 and becoming an additional winning in the additional lottery process is mutual Will be identical to Further, the probability of winning in addition in the additional lottery processing executed with the index value IV = 4 being elected is also common to all settings. Specifically, the probability of winning in the additional lottery processing in the additional lottery process executed with the index value IV = 4 being elected is 1/4 in all settings.

  Since both the winning probability of the index value IV = 1 to 4 and the probability of being added winning in the additional lottery process are common to all settings, the probability that the number of continued games in ART state is generated is common to all settings. Furthermore, the number of games to be added in the case of an additional winning in the additional lottery process is also common to all settings. As a result, the expected value of the number of continued games added in the ART state is also common to all settings. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an advantage or a disadvantage between settings with respect to the addition of the number of continued games in the ART state.

  FIG. 65 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the dummy notification table.

  In the present embodiment, as already described above, the dummy notification lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won and the additional lottery process results in the winning. In this case, the probability that the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process is lower as the set value is larger. On the other hand, in each setting value, a notification instructing the first reel 32L to stop first, a notification instructing the first reel 32M to stop first, and a notification instructing the first reel 32R to stop first Mutual selection rates are the same. Specifically, when the set value is “1” to “3”, the probability that the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process is 1/1, and the notification for stopping the left reel 32L as the dummy notification is performed first. The probability of being executed, the probability of being notified that the middle reel 32M is to be first stopped as a dummy notification, and the probability that the notification being made to first stop the right reel 32R be a dummy notification are mutually the same 1/3. It has become. When the setting value is "4", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 3/5, and the probability that the notification to cause the left reel 32L to first stop as the dummy notification is executed, and the dummy notification The probability that the notification to stop the middle reel 32M for the first stop is performed, and the probability that the notification to stop the right reel 32R for the first stop as the dummy notification is the same 1/5. When the set value is "5", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 3/8, and the probability that the notification for stopping the left reel 32L as the first notification is executed as the dummy notification, as the dummy notification The probability that the notification to stop the middle reel 32M for the first stop is performed, and the probability that the notification to stop the right reel 32R for the first stop as the dummy notification are the same 1/8. When the setting value is "6", the probability of being a dummy notification winning in the dummy notification lottery process is 3/10, the probability that the notification to make the left reel 32L first stop as a dummy notification is executed, and a dummy notification The probability that the notification to stop the middle reel 32M for the first stop is performed and the probability that the notification to stop the right reel 32R for the first stop as the dummy notification are 1/10 of the same value.

  With the above configuration, when the set value is “1” to “3”, when the index value IV = 4 is won in the ART preparation state or the ART state, the dummy notification is surely executed. When the set value is “4” to “6”, the dummy notification may not be executed even if the index value IV = 4 is won in the ART preparation state or the ART state. As a result, when the bell winning combination is established without notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63, it is determined that the set value is "4" or more. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the bell winning will be established without being notified of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. .

  In the case where the set value is “4” to “6”, the probability that the dummy notification is performed when the index value IV = 4 is won is lower as the set value is larger. Therefore, the setting value increases as the frequency of occurrence of the addition of the number of continued games in the ART state increases, triggered by the establishment of the bell winning without notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63 It will be. Therefore, from this point as well, the player pays attention to whether or not the bell winning will be established without being notified of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63, thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Other Embodiments
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different embodiments may be individually applied to the configurations of the above-described embodiment, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined with each other, and the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined or applied separately or in combination with each other. Good. In addition, the configuration described as another form of the predetermined embodiment among the above-described embodiments may be applied to an embodiment different from the predetermined embodiment.

  In the first to eighth embodiments, the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 in the game are the case where the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state are elected. The effects performed by the image display device 63 may be the same, or the selection modes of the effects may be the same. In this case, it is possible to make it impossible for the player to determine which index value IV = 4 or 5 was won from the contents of the effect.

  In the first to eighth embodiments, the index values IV = 4 and 5 in the non-BB state correspond to the index values IV = 2 and 3 in the BB state, but the index value IV in the non-BB state Even if the roles corresponding to = 4 and 5 are in the BB state, they may be set as index values IV = 4 and 5.

  -Although the transition to the AT state or the addition of the number of continued games in the ART state occurs as the provision of the predetermined benefit, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the game may be configured to be advantageous to the player over a predetermined number of games and transition to a state different from the AT state may occur. Transition to an advantageous state such as AT state, RT state and so-called CT state A configuration may be made in which transition to a chance state where the probability is high occurs, or a configuration may be given to increase the transition probability to an advantageous state when transitioning to the chance state.

  In the above embodiment, although the bonus for paying out the medal is awarded when the small winning combination is established, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, as long as the player is given some bonus. Good. For example, a prize other than the medal may be paid out when the small winning combination is established. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion or medal payout functions and manages the medals owned by the player as credits, the increase of credited medals corresponds to the provision of a privilege.

  The present invention may be applied to a so-called B-type slot machine, and also C-type, composite type of A-type and C-type, composite type of B-type and C-type, and further RT game, CT game or AT game. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a provided type.

  The symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, characters, etc., and may be geometrical lines, figures, etc. Further, it is also possible to configure the symbol by light, color or the like, or the symbol may be configured by a three-dimensional shape or the like, or the symbol may be configured by combining these symbols. That is, the design should just have a function as information having distinctiveness.

  In each of the above embodiments, the slot machine 10 is embodied. However, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game is performed using a game ball as a game medium. It may apply to the game machine of the form which united.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configuration shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
Combination lottery means (function of executing processing of step S401 to step S408 in the main side MPU 72) that executes lottery processing of combination based on the fact that the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop fluctuation display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
When the start operation means is operated and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the pattern is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Symbol display control means (a function for executing the reel rotation process and the reel stop process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means;
After the change display of the pattern, when the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as formation of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination Executing means (function of executing the processing of step S309 and step S1110 in the main MPU 72);
Setting means (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
In the gaming machine provided with
The predetermined event (watermelon winning data is set in the first to fourth embodiments in the lottery process of the role or the variable display of the symbol, and stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the ninth to thirteenth embodiments) The predetermined profit giving means (the first to give a predetermined profit (transition to the AT state, addition to the number of continued games in the ART state) with at least one condition that the notification of the order be made that the bell winning is realized) In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1411 to step S1412, step S1416, step S1504 to step S1505, step S1604 and step S1704 in the main side MPU 72, and in the ninth to tenth embodiment, the main side MPU 72 Function to execute the processing of step S2404 in the main body M in the eleventh embodiment Function of executing step S2604 in U72, function of executing step S2704 in main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment, and function of executing step S2804 in main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment) Equipped
The probability that the predetermined benefit is given is the same or substantially the same among the setting values of the plurality of stages,
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the predetermined event occurs is different between a first set value and a second set value included in the plurality of set values.

  According to the feature A1, since the predetermined profit is given when the predetermined event occurs, the player plays the game while expecting the occurrence of the predetermined event. In this case, it is preferred that the probability that the predetermined benefit be given is the same or substantially the same among the setting values of the plurality of stages so that there is no advantage or disadvantage between the setting values in relation to the provision of the predetermined benefit. It becomes possible. Further, the probability of occurrence of the predetermined event is different between the first set value and the second set value. In a configuration in which the probability that the predetermined benefit is given is the same or substantially the same among the setting values in a plurality of stages, the predetermined probability is different because the probability that the predetermined event occurs is different between the first setting value and the second setting value. The probability that a predetermined profit is given to the occurrence of an event will be different between the first set value and the second set value. By this, even if the configuration is made such that there is no advantage or disadvantage among the set values for the provision of the predetermined benefit, the set value is given to the player based on the probability that the predetermined benefit is given for the occurrence of the predetermined event. It becomes possible to make it forecast.

  Feature A2. In the predetermined event, when the variable display of the pattern is stopped, the first corresponding pattern (combination of the watermelon patterns in the first to fourth embodiments), which is any combination of the predetermined pattern and the predetermined pattern, is displayed as a stop. The gaming machine according to the feature A1, characterized in that it is to be won or to be able to stop display of the first corresponding pattern in the lottery process of the combination.

  According to the feature A2, the predetermined profit is given based on the first corresponding picture being stopped and displayed, and it becomes possible to make the player pay attention to the stop of the fluctuation display of the picture and the predetermined profit It is possible to make it easy for the player to understand when the player is given. In this case, by providing the configuration described in the above-mentioned feature A1, even if the configuration is such that there is no advantage or disadvantage among the set values with respect to the provision of the predetermined benefit, the stop of the first corresponding pattern It is possible to make the player predict the set value based on the probability that the predetermined profit is given to the display.

Feature A3. The pattern display means comprises a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the pattern display area,
The pattern display control means controls the pattern display means so that the variation display of the pattern in the pattern display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means.
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the predetermined event is that a predetermined stop order is notified as a stop order of the fluctuation display of patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas.

  According to the feature A3, when the predetermined profit is given based on the notification of the predetermined stop order as the stop order of the fluctuation display of the pattern, the player is made to pay attention to the notification of the stop order. It becomes possible. In this case, by including the configuration described in the above-mentioned feature A1, even if the configuration is such that there is no advantage or disadvantage between the set values with respect to the provision of the predetermined profit, the stop of the fluctuation display of the pattern It becomes possible to make the player predict the set value based on the probability that the predetermined profit is given to the notification of the predetermined stop order as the order.

Feature A4. The probability that the predetermined event occurs in a predetermined situation (non-BB state) is higher in the second set value than in the first set value,
The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the probability that the predetermined event occurs in a specific situation (BB state) is that the first set value is higher than the second set value. .

  According to the feature A4, the predetermined situation and the specific situation have different tendencies in relation to the set value of the probability that the predetermined profit is given to the occurrence of the predetermined event. This makes it possible for the player to predict the setting value in a mode corresponding to each of the predetermined situation and the specific situation.

Feature A5. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
Combination lottery means (function of executing processing of step S401 to step S408 in the main side MPU 72) that executes lottery processing of combination based on the fact that the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop fluctuation display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
When the start operation means is operated and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the pattern is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Symbol display control means (a function for executing the reel rotation process and the reel stop process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means;
After the change display of the pattern, when the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as formation of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination Executing means (function of executing the processing of step S309 and step S1110 in the main MPU 72);
Setting means (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
In the gaming machine provided with
The first combination in the lottery process of the combination (in the first to fourth embodiment index value IV = 4 in the non-BB condition and index value IV = 2 in the BB condition, in the ninth embodiment index in the non-BB condition A predetermined profit (transition to the AT state) on at least one condition that the value IV = 1 to 3) is won or that the first combination is won and the first corresponding prize corresponding to the first combination is established. , Predetermined profit giving means (in the first to fourth embodiments, step S1411 to step S1412, step S1416, step S1504 to step S1505, step S1604 and step S1604 and steps in the first to fourth embodiments) A function to execute the processing of S1704, and in the ninth embodiment, the step S240 in the main MPU 72 A function) for executing the process,
The probability that the first combination is won and the predetermined profit is given is the same or substantially the same among the setting values of the plurality of stages,
The second combination (index values IV = 5 in the non-BB state and index value IV = 3 in the BB state in the first to fourth embodiments as a combination to be a lottery target in the lottery process of the above-mentioned combination), ninth embodiment In the form there is an index value IV = 4) in the non-BB state,
When the second corresponding winning corresponding to the second combination is established, the first corresponding symbol (the first to fourth symbols) which is any one of the combination of the symbol and the symbol displayed when the first corresponding winning is established. In the embodiment of the present invention, the combination of the watermelon pattern and the combination of the bell pattern in the ninth embodiment are stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized in that a probability of winning the second combination is different between a first set value and a second set value included in the plurality of set values.

  According to the feature A5, since the predetermined profit is awarded with at least one condition that the first combination is won or the first corresponding winning combination is established, the player is elected to the first combination or the first correspondence A game will be played while expecting that a winning will be established. In this case, when the probability that the first combination is won and the predetermined profit is given is the same or substantially the same among the setting values of the plurality of stages, there is an advantage or disadvantage between the setting values in connection with the giving It is possible to prevent it from occurring.

  In addition, while the second combination is set in which the first corresponding pattern, which is displayed to be stopped when the first corresponding winning is established, is to be stopped when the winning is established, the probability of winning the second combination is The first set value is different from the second set value. As described above, by providing the configuration in which the probability that the first combination is won and the predetermined profit is given is the same or substantially the same among the setting values of the plurality of stages, the first corresponding symbol is stopped. When displayed, the probability that the predetermined profit is given will be different between the first set value and the second set value. Thereby, even if the configuration is made such that there is no advantage or disadvantage among the set values for the provision of the predetermined benefit, the player is set based on the probability that the predetermined benefit is given for the stop of the first corresponding pattern. It is possible to predict the value.

  Feature A6. The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the predetermined profit is different from the profit provided by the control by the response executing means when the first corresponding winning is achieved.

  According to the feature A6, since the predetermined profit is awarded as a profit different from the profit given to the control by the response execution means when the first corresponding winning is achieved, the player's attention to the predetermined profit is given It is possible to increase the degree.

  Feature A7. The predetermined profit giving means executes a profit giving lottery process based on the winning of the first combination or the establishment of the first corresponding winning, and the winning is made in the profit giving lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature A5 or A6 characterized by providing a predetermined profit.

  According to the feature A7, it is possible for the player to expect not only the first corresponding winning to be established but also to be won in the profit giving lottery process, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Feature A8. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A7, wherein the predetermined profit is not awarded in any of the case where the second combination is won and the case where the second corresponding winning combination is established.

  According to the feature A8, since the predetermined profit is not awarded in any of the case where the second hand is won and the case where the second corresponding winning is achieved, it is possible to set the second It becomes possible to set the winning probability.

Feature A9. The probability of winning the first combination in the lottery process of the combination is the same or substantially the same among the setting values of the plurality of stages,
The probability that the predetermined profit is awarded when the first combination is won or the first corresponding winning combination is established in the lottery process of the combination is the same or substantially the same among the plurality of setting values. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A8, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature A9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while making it possible to divert data between the setting values to determine the winning probability of the first combination and the assignment probability of the predetermined profit. .

Feature A10. After the variation display of the pattern, the correspondence execution means displays a winning correspondence pattern, which is any of a pattern and a combination of patterns corresponding to the combination that has been won in the lottery process of the combination, in the valid correspondence stop area. If there is a winning combination, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed.
The features A5 to A9 are characterized in that the first corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed in the effective corresponding stop area in any of the case where the first corresponding winning is established and the case where the second corresponding winning is established. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A10, it is possible for the player to predict the set value based on grasping the application probability of the predetermined profit to the stop display of the first corresponding pattern in the effective corresponding stop area.

  Characteristics A11. The stop area in which the first corresponding symbol is displayed in a stopped state when the first corresponding winning is realized, and the stopped area in which the first corresponding image is displayed in a stopped state when the second corresponding winning is realized. A game machine according to any one of features A5 to A10, characterized in that:

  According to the feature A11, it is possible to achieve the effects as described above while making it possible to strictly distinguish between the first corresponding winning and the second corresponding winning.

  Feature A12. When the second combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the first corresponding symbol is not displayed in a stop display, but a stop display when the first combination is won A game according to any one of features A5 to A11, characterized in that another corresponding pattern (a combination of symbols corresponding to the establishment of the first compensation prize), which is any of a combination of a symbol and a symbol not to be displayed Machine.

  According to the feature A12, when the skilled player wins the second combination, the second correspondence pattern is not displayed in place of the first correspondence pattern, but the second correspondence pattern is displayed. It becomes possible to grasp the winning probability individually and to predict the set value based thereon.

  Feature A13. When the second combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, it is more advantageous for the player when the first corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed than when the other corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed The gaming machine according to feature A12, characterized in that

  According to the feature A13, when the second combination is won, the stop operation is performed so that the first corresponding pattern is stopped to be given a more advantageous profit, or the second combination is won It is possible to allow the player to select whether to perform a stop operation so that another corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in order to individually grasp the probability.

Feature A14. The probability of winning the second combination in a predetermined situation (non-BB condition) is higher in the second set value than in the first set value,
The probability that the second combination or the combination corresponding to the second combination is won in the specific situation (BB condition) is characterized in that the first set value is higher than the second set value. The gaming machine according to any one of A13.

  According to the feature A14, the tendency in relation to the setting value of the probability that the predetermined profit is given to the stop display of the first corresponding pattern is different between the predetermined situation and the specific situation. This makes it possible for the player to predict the setting value in a mode corresponding to each of the predetermined situation and the specific situation.

Feature A15. The pattern display means comprises a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the pattern display area,
The pattern display control means controls the pattern display means so that the variation display of the pattern in the pattern display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means.
One of the first combination and the second combination is a combination that can be achieved when the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped in a predetermined correspondence order,
The other combination of the first combination and the second combination is a combination which allows a corresponding winning to be established regardless of the stop order of the variation display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas,
This game machine is
A unit (function of executing the processing of step S411 in the main MPU 72) for notifying the order of the predetermined correspondence when the one of the combinations is won;
A unit for notifying the order of the predetermined correspondence when the other combination is won (a function for executing a process for dummy notification in the main MPU 72);
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A5 to A14, comprising:

  According to the feature A15, even if the configuration is made such that there is no advantage or disadvantage among the set values with respect to the provision of the predetermined benefit, the probability that the predetermined benefit is provided for the notification of the predetermined correspondence order. Can be made different between the first set value and the second set value. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the notification of the order of the predetermined correspondence.

  Note that even if any one or a plurality of configurations among features A1 to A15, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D18, and features E1 to E7 are applied to the features A1 to A15. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
Combination lottery means (function of executing processing of step S401 to step S408 in the main side MPU 72) that executes lottery processing of combination based on the fact that the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop fluctuation display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
When the start operation means is operated and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the pattern is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Symbol display control means (a function for executing the reel rotation process and the reel stop process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means;
After the change display of the pattern, when the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as formation of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination Executing means (function of executing the processing of step S309 and step S1110 in the main MPU 72);
Setting means (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
In the gaming machine provided with
The predetermined combination (index value IV = 4 in non-BB condition, index value IV = 2 in BB condition) and the specific combination (index value IV = 5 in non-BB condition) are selected as lottery combinations in the lottery process of the combination. , And index value IV in the BB state, 3),
The predetermined profit (transition to the AT state, taking at least one condition that the predetermined combination has been won by the lottery process of the combination or that the predetermined combination prize corresponding to the combination is established. In addition to the number of continued games in ART state, at least the fact that the specific combination is won in the lottery process of the combination or the specific combination winning combination corresponding to the specific combination is established by winning the specific combination A predetermined profit giving means for giving the predetermined profit as one condition (a function of executing the processing of steps S1411 to S1412, step S1416, steps S1504 to S1505, and steps S1604 and S1704 in the main MPU 72)
The probability of the sum of the probability that the predetermined role is won and the predetermined profit is given and the probability that the specific role is won and the predetermined profit is given is the same or substantially the same among the plurality of setting values. Are identical
The probability of winning the predetermined combination and the probability of winning the specific combination, and the probability of the predetermined benefit being awarded when the predetermined combination is won and the predetermined benefit when the specific combination is won A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the probability of being made differs between a first set value and a second set value included in the set values of the plurality of stages.

  According to the feature B1, while the predetermined profit is given upon winning of the predetermined combination or the establishment of the predetermined correspondence prize, the predetermined profit is triggered upon the winning of the specific combination or the establishment of the specific correspondence prize. The player is expected to play the game while expecting these to occur. In this case, the probability of the sum of the probability that the predetermined combination is won and the predetermined profit is given and the probability that the specific combination is won and the predetermined profit is provided is the same or substantially the same among the set values. It is possible to ensure that there is no advantage or disadvantage between the set values with respect to the provision of the predetermined benefit. Further, each of the probability of winning a predetermined combination and the probability of winning a specific combination, the probability of a predetermined benefit being awarded when the predetermined combination is won, and the probability of the predetermined benefit being awarded when the specific combination is won At least one of the two is different between the first set value and the second set value. As a result, the player is given to the player from the relationship of the ratio of the predetermined combination and the specific combination becoming the trigger for giving the predetermined profit, and the probability that the predetermined combination will be awarded when the predetermined combination and the specific combination are won. It is possible to predict the set value.

  Feature B2. The first set value and the second set value are different between the probability that the predetermined combination is won and the predetermined profit is given and the probability that the specific combination is won and the predetermined profit is provided The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that

  According to the feature B2, even if the probability that the predetermined profit is given is the same or substantially the same among the set values, the probability that the predetermined hand is won and the predetermined profit is given and the specific hand are won Then, it becomes possible to predict the set value by grasping the ratio to the probability that the predetermined profit is given.

Feature B3. The probability that the predetermined profit is awarded when the predetermined combination is won is higher in the second set value than in the first set value,
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the probability that the predetermined profit is awarded when the specific combination is won is that the first set value is higher than the second set value.

  According to the feature B3, it becomes possible to predict the set value by grasping the type of the combination that is likely to be the trigger of the provision of the predetermined profit.

Feature B4. The probability that the predetermined benefit is won by winning the predetermined combination is higher in the second set value than in the first set value,
In the game according to any one of features B1 to B3, the first set value is higher than the second set value in the probability that the specific combination is won and the predetermined profit is given. Machine.

  According to the feature B4, it is possible to predict the set value by grasping the probability that the predetermined profit is given when the predetermined combination or the specific combination is won.

Feature B5. A predetermined correspondence pattern (combination of watermelon patterns), which is any one of a predetermined pattern and a predetermined pattern combination, is stopped and displayed when the predetermined correspondence winning combination is established,
Any one of the features B1 to B4 characterized in that a specific corresponding pattern (combination of bell symbols) which is any one of a specific pattern and a specific pattern combination is stopped when the specific corresponding winning combination is established. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature B5, it is possible to grasp which of the predetermined corresponding winning and the specific corresponding winning has occurred based on the result of the stop display.

Feature B6. When the specific corresponding winning is established, a predetermined corresponding symbol (combination of watermelon symbols), which is any of a symbol and a combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed when the predetermined corresponding winning is established, is stopped and displayed.
The stop area in which the predetermined correspondence pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the predetermined corresponding winning is established is different from the stop area in which the predetermined correspondence image is displayed in a stopped state when the specific correspondence winning is established. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5.

  According to the feature B6, since the predetermined correspondence symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of whether the predetermined correspondence prize is established or the specific correspondence prize is established, the player who expects the predetermined profit to be awarded is It is expected that the predetermined correspondence pattern will be stopped and displayed. Since the stop area where the predetermined correspondence symbol is displayed is different depending on whether the predetermined correspondence prize is established or the specific correspondence prize is established, the player who wants to predict the set value stops displaying the predetermined correspondence symbol. It will focus on the area.

  Feature B7. When the specific combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the predetermined correspondence pattern is not displayed in a stopped state, and a symbol not displayed in a stopped state when the predetermined combination is won The gaming machine according to the feature B6, wherein another corresponding pattern (a combination of symbols corresponding to the establishment of the first compensation winning) which is any of the combinations of patterns may be displayed in a stopped state.

  According to the feature B7, when a skilled player wins the specific part, the predetermined correspondence pattern is not displayed in a stopped state but is displayed in a different correspondence pattern, so that the winning probability of the specific part is determined. It becomes possible to grasp individually and to predict the set value based thereon.

  Feature B8. When the specific combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the case where the predetermined correspondence pattern is stopped and displayed is more advantageous for the player than the case where the different correspondence pattern is displayed and stopped. The gaming machine according to the feature B7.

  According to the feature B8, when a specific combination is won, a stop operation is performed so that a predetermined correspondence pattern is displayed in a stopped state so that a more advantageous profit is given, or the selection probability of the specific combination is individualized It is possible to allow the player to select whether to perform the stop operation so that another corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in order to grasp it.

  Feature B9. The predetermined profit is different from the profit provided by the control by the corresponding execution means when the predetermined correspondence prize is established and the profit provided by the control by the correspondence execution means when the specific correspondence prize is established. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that

  According to the feature B9, since the predetermined profit is provided as a profit different from the profit given to the control by the response execution means when the predetermined corresponding winning or the specific corresponding winning is established, the game for the predetermined profit being given It is possible to increase the degree of attention of persons.

  Feature B10. The predetermined profit giving means executes a profit giving lottery process based on the winning of the predetermined combination or the establishment of the predetermined corresponding winning, and the predetermined profit is obtained when the profit giving lottery process is won. Is executed, and the profit giving lottery process is executed based on the winning of the specific combination or the establishment of the specific corresponding prize, and the predetermined profit is given when the profit giving lottery process is won. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature B10, it is possible for the player to expect not only the first corresponding winning to be established but also to be won in the profit giving lottery process, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Even if any one or a plurality of configurations among features A1 to A15, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D18, and features E1 to E7 are applied to the features B1 to B10. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
Combination lottery means (function of executing processing of step S401 to step S408 in the main side MPU 72) that executes lottery processing of combination based on the fact that the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop fluctuation display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
When the start operation means is operated and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the pattern is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Symbol display control means (a function for executing the reel rotation process and the reel stop process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means;
After the change display of the pattern, when the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as formation of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination Executing means (function of executing the processing of step S309 and step S1110 in the main MPU 72);
In the gaming machine provided with
In each of the first gaming state (ART state) and the second gaming state (AT state and in the normal mode or the first RT mode), a predetermined profit (the number of continued games in the ART state) different from the control corresponding to the winning combination Function of executing the processing of step S1908 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment, and executing the processing of steps S2005 and S2007 in the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment Function, in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2108 in the main MPU 72,
The first lottery result (being elected with index value IV = 16 in the second RT mode in the non-BB state) exists as a lottery result of the lottery process of the combination in at least the first gaming state,
In the second gaming state, the probability of becoming a first lottery result is lower than that in the first gaming state, or in the second gaming state, the first lottery result is not generated,
The predetermined profit giving means is
First correspondence giving means (in the sixth embodiment, affirmation determination in step S1902 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) which gives the predetermined profit with at least one condition being the first lottery result in the first gaming state Function of executing the process of step S1908 after that, in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2005 after making an affirmative determination in step S2004 in the main MPU 72, in the eighth embodiment, the step in the main MPU 72 A function of executing the process of step S2108 after making an affirmative determination in S2102),
By making the first gaming state and the second gaming state different in the degree of advantage regarding the provision of the predetermined profit with respect to the giving opportunity other than to become the first lottery result in the lottery process of the role, Second correspondence giving means (in the sixth embodiment, to the step S1904 in the main side MPU 72) to make the first game state and the second game state have the same or substantially the same degree of advantage with respect to the provision of the predetermined profit Function of executing the process of step S1908 after making an affirmative determination, the function of executing the process of step S2007 in the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment, and an affirmative determination in step S2104 in the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment And the function of executing the process of step S2108) after
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, since the predetermined benefit is provided in each of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the player can receive the predetermined benefit in any of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. It will be expected. In addition, in the first gaming state, the predetermined benefit is awarded with at least one condition being the first lottery result, and therefore, it is expected that the first lottery result will be in the first gaming state. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the probability of becoming the first lottery result decreases or does not become the first lottery result. Thereby, in the second gaming state, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the provision opportunity of the predetermined profit other than the first lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, as described above, even if the probability of becoming the first lottery result decreases or does not become the first lottery result in the second gaming state, other than the first lottery result in the lottery process of the winning combination The difference between the first gaming state and the second gaming state is that the degree of advantage regarding the provision of the predetermined profit for the giving opportunity of the is, the degree of advantage of the first gaming state and the second gaming state regarding the provision of the predetermined profit The same or substantially the same. As a result, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while preventing the difference in the degree of advantage between the first gaming state and the second gaming state with respect to the provision of the predetermined profit.

  Feature C2. The second correspondence giving means is a lottery result that can occur in the lottery process of the combination in both the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and both of the first gaming state and the second gaming state From the first gaming state, the degree of advantage regarding the provision of the predetermined profit for the second lottery result (winning with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state), which is a lottery result that can trigger the provision of the predetermined profit in Also, by making the second gaming state higher, it is possible to make the first gaming state and the second gaming state have the same or substantially the same degree of advantage with respect to the provision of the predetermined profit. The gaming machine according to the feature C1 characterized by the feature.

  According to the feature C2, in the second gaming state, the player's expectation for the second lottery result can be made higher than that in the first gaming state. In addition, even in the configuration in which the player's sense of expectation for the second lottery result is increased in the second gaming state as described above, the degree of advantage is obtained between the first gaming state and the second gaming state with respect to the provision of the predetermined profit. It is possible to make no difference in Further, since the second lottery result is a trigger for giving a predetermined profit even in the first gaming state, it is easy for the player to understand the trigger for giving a predetermined profit.

  Feature C3. The second correspondence giving unit is configured to make the probability of the second lottery result becoming the second lottery result and the predetermined profit being given being higher in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature C3, while the difference between the first gaming state and the second gaming state is not given to the degree of advantage regarding the provision of the predetermined profit, the player for the second lottery result in the second gaming state It is possible to increase the degree of attention.

  Feature C4. The second correspondence giving means makes the probability that the second lottery result will be the same or almost the same in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, while the predetermined in the case where the second lottery result is reached The gaming machine according to the feature C2 or C3 characterized in that the second gaming state is higher in the provision probability of profit than the first gaming state.

  According to the feature C4, increasing the player's attention to the second lottery result in the second gaming state while making the probability of the second lottery result not to be largely different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state Is possible.

  Feature C5. The second correspondence giving means makes the second gaming state higher in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state when the second lottery process results and the predetermined profit is awarded. A game machine according to any one of features C2 to C4, characterized in that

  According to the feature C5, it becomes possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the second lottery result in the second gaming state, and to the provision of the predetermined profit.

  Feature C6. The second correspondence giving means is a second lottery result (outlier result) in which the lottery result of the lottery process of the combination in the second gaming state is not an opportunity to give the predetermined profit in the first gaming state In this case, the predetermined profit may be awarded, so that the first gaming state and the second gaming state have the same or substantially the same degree of advantage with respect to the provision of the predetermined profit. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature C6, in the first gaming state, the second lottery result that did not become the giving opportunity of the predetermined profit becomes the giving opportunity of the predetermined profit in the second gaming state. As a result, it becomes possible to give the player unexpectedness with respect to the fact that the predetermined benefit has been provided triggered by the second lottery result in the second gaming state. In addition, even in the configuration in which such unexpectedness is given, it is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage between the first gaming state and the second gaming state regarding the provision of the predetermined profit.

Feature C7. The first lottery result is a result of winning the first granting combination in the lottery process of the combination,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6, wherein the second lottery result is a result of winning a second giving combination in a lottery process of the combination.

  According to the feature C7, the corresponding winning can be established in each of the case of the first lottery result and the case of the second lottery result. This makes it possible for the player to be clear that the first lottery result and the second lottery result are reached.

Feature C8. One of the first lottery result and the second lottery result is a result of winning a predetermined combination in the combination lottery process,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6, wherein the other of the first lottery result and the second lottery result is a result of not being won by any combination in the lottery process of the combination. .

  According to the feature C8, the first lottery result and the second lottery result can be clearly differentiated. In addition, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the result of not being won by any combination in the lottery process of the combination.

Feature C9. The first gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of establishing a re-game winning is higher than that of the second gaming state.
The first lottery result is a lottery result of winning the combination that enables the establishment of the re-playing game in the lottery process of the combination,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C8, wherein the first lottery result is not obtained in the second gaming state.

  According to the feature C9, even if it is a second gaming state in which the probability of establishing a rebirth winning is lower than the first gaming state and accordingly the first lottery result does not occur, the first gaming state regarding provision of a predetermined profit It is possible to make the degree of

Feature C10. A predetermined mode corresponding role (index in a non-BB state) where establishment of a predetermined winning (bell winning) is possible when the variable display of the pattern is stopped in a predetermined mode as a winning combination in the lottery process of the role The value IV = 1 to 3) exists,
Both the first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the predetermined mode is notified when the predetermined mode corresponding role is won in the lottery process of the role,
This gaming machine is provided with means (function to execute the process of step S1710 in the main MPU 72) to shift the gaming state to the second gaming state when a predetermined fall condition is satisfied in the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature C9, characterized in that

  According to the feature C10, even if the predetermined fall condition is satisfied in the first gaming state, which is a gaming state in which the predetermined aspect is notified when the probability of winning a replay is high and the predetermined aspect corresponding role is won, Although the probability that the re-playing game winning will be established is low, the gaming state shifts to the second gaming state, which is a gaming state in which the predetermined aspect is notified when the predetermined aspect corresponding role is won. As a result, even if a predetermined fall condition is established, it is possible to prevent the player's advantage from being extremely reduced. Furthermore, even with the configuration of the feature C1, even in the second gaming state, the degree of advantage regarding the provision of the predetermined profit is the same as or substantially the same as the first gaming state. This makes it possible to suppress the player's feeling of disappointment in the second gaming state.

  Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A15, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D18, and features E1 to E7 are applied to the features C1 to C10. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
Combination lottery means (function of executing processing of step S401 to step S408 in the main side MPU 72) that executes lottery processing of combination based on the fact that the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop fluctuation display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
When the start operation means is operated and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the pattern is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Symbol display control means (a function for executing the reel rotation process and the reel stop process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means;
After the change display of the pattern, when the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as formation of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination Executing means (function of executing the processing of step S309 and step S1110 in the main MPU 72);
In the gaming machine provided with
A predetermined mode corresponding combination (in the ninth to thirteenth embodiments) in which establishment of a predetermined winning is possible when the variable display of the pattern is stopped in a predetermined mode as a combination to be a lottery target in the lottery process of the role The index value IV = 1 to 3) and the common winning becomes possible when the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the predetermined mode and not stopped in the predetermined mode. Role (index value IV = 4 in the ninth to thirteenth embodiments) exists,
This game machine is
The first notification means for notifying the predetermined mode when the predetermined mode corresponding role is won in the lottery process of the role (function for executing the processing of step S2203 to step S2204 in the main side MPU 72, for notification in the effect side MPU 82 Function to execute processing),
The second notification means (the function for executing the dummy notification process in the main side MPU 72, the function for executing the notification process in the effect side MPU 82) that notifies the predetermined mode when the common role is won in the lottery process of the role )When,
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the common role is won and the predetermined mode is notified in the lottery process of the role is different between a situation advantageous to the player and a situation disadvantageous to the player .

  According to the feature D1, when the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won, the predetermined winning is achieved on condition that the variation display of the pattern is stopped in the predetermined mode, and therefore the player is in the state of being notified of the predetermined mode It will be expected. In this case, the predetermined mode can be notified even if the player is elected to the common winning combination in which the predetermined winning combination is to be established regardless of whether or not the predetermined mode is stopped. The frequency with which is notified is different between the situation advantageous to the player and the situation disadvantageous to the player. This makes it possible for the player to predict which of the advantageous situation and the adverse situation is based on the execution frequency of the notification of the predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. As the predetermined mode corresponding role, a first predetermined mode corresponding role (index value IV = 3 in the ninth to thirteenth embodiments) in which the predetermined mode is the first predetermined mode, and the predetermined mode is the second predetermined mode A second predetermined mode corresponding role (index value IV = 1 in the ninth to thirteenth embodiments) exists,
The second notification means can notify the first predetermined mode when the common role is won in the lottery process of the role, and can notify the second predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that

  According to the feature D2, since the type of the predetermined aspect to be notified is not limited to one when the winning combination is won, the execution timing of the notification of the predetermined aspect is from the type of the predetermined aspect which is the notification target. It becomes possible to make it hard to understand which of the predetermined mode corresponding role and the common role.

Feature D3. Setting means for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (function to execute the processing of step S106 in the main MPU 72);
The probability that the common role is won in the lottery process of the role and the predetermined mode is notified is different between the first set value and the second set value included in the plurality of set values. The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2.

  According to the feature D3, it is possible to predict the set value from the frequency at which the predetermined mode is notified or the frequency at which the predetermined winning is achieved without the predetermined mode being notified.

  Feature D4. The gaming machine according to the feature D3, wherein the probability of winning the predetermined mode corresponding role is the same or substantially the same among the setting values of the plurality of stages.

  According to the feature D4, the first set value and the second set of probability that the predetermined mode is notified when the common combination is won in the configuration in which the probability of winning the predetermined mode corresponding role is the same or substantially the same among the set values. By being different from the set value, the set value can be predicted from the frequency at which the predetermined mode is notified. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the notification of the predetermined mode.

Feature D5. Setting means for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (function to execute the processing of step S106 in the main MPU 72);
There are a plurality of types of predetermined modes,
The selection rate of the type of the predetermined mode to be notified when the common role is won and the predetermined mode is notified is a first set value and a second set value included in the plurality of set values. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D4 characterized in that

  According to the feature D5, it is possible to predict the setting value from the selection rate of the type of the predetermined aspect to be notified. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the type of the predetermined mode to be notified.

  Feature D6. The second notification means is notified of a first predetermined mode as the predetermined mode when the common winning combination is won in the lottery process of the combination in a situation where the second set value is the first set value, and the second set value is the second set value. The gaming machine according to the feature D5, wherein the first predetermined mode is not notified when the common combination is won in a lottery process of the combination in a certain situation.

  According to the feature D6, when the first predetermined mode is notified, the possibility of being the first set value rather than the second set value becomes high. Thus, the player pays attention to whether or not the first predetermined mode is notified.

Feature D7. When the predetermined mode corresponding role is won and the predetermined mode is notified by the first notification execution means (image display device 63) by the control of the first notification means, the type corresponds to the type of the predetermined mode notified. The notification control means (function to execute the process of step S2203 in the main side MPU 72) which causes the display to be executed by the second notification execution means (special display unit 100),
The notification control means is configured to cause a number corresponding to the first set value to be displayed by the second notification execution means when the first predetermined state is notified by the first notification execution means. The gaming machine according to feature D6, comprising:

  According to the feature D7, it is possible to grasp whether or not it is the first set value by grasping the display content of the second notification execution means when the first predetermined mode is notified.

  Feature D8. When the predetermined mode is notified by the first notification execution means when the common role is won, the notification control means causes the common display to be the common display regardless of the type of the predetermined aspect being notified. 2. A game machine according to the feature D7, characterized by comprising means (function to execute the processing of step S2507 in the main MPU 72) to be performed by the notification execution means.

  According to the feature D8, when the common role is won and the first notification execution means notifies the predetermined aspect, the common indication is the second notification execution means regardless of the type of the predetermined aspect notified It takes place at On the other hand, when the first predetermined mode is notified by winning the predetermined mode corresponding combination, a number corresponding to the first set value is displayed by the second notification execution means. Thereby, in order to grasp that it is the first set value when the winning combination is won and the first predetermined mode is notified, the winning predetermined action corresponding role is notified and the first predetermined mode is notified It is necessary for the player to store the contents of the second notification execution means in the above.

  Feature D9. A predetermined profit giving means capable of giving a predetermined profit (addition to the number of continued games in the ART state) different from the control for the above-mentioned winning combination in at least one of the case of winning the predetermined mode supporting role and the winning of the common role. (In the ninth embodiment, a function to execute the processing of step S2404 in the main MPU 72, a function to execute the processing in step S2604 in the main MPU 72 in the eleventh embodiment, and a step in the main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment A gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D8, comprising a function of executing the processing of S2704, and a function of executing the processing of step S2804 in the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment.

  According to the feature D9, the predetermined profit may be awarded when the predetermined winning is achieved. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the establishment of the predetermined winning.

  Feature D10. The predetermined profit giving means is capable of giving the predetermined profit when winning in the predetermined mode corresponding role, and does not give the predetermined profit when winning in the common role. The gaming machine described in D9.

  According to the feature D10, while the predetermined profit can be awarded when winning the predetermined mode corresponding role, the predetermined profit is not awarded when winning the common role, so the game against the notification of the predetermined aspect It is possible to increase the degree of attention of persons. In this case, since the predetermined mode can be notified even when the player has won the common part, it is possible to generate many situations in which the expectation for the given profit is increased.

Feature D11. Setting means for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (function to execute the processing of step S106 in the main MPU 72);
The probability that the predetermined mode corresponding role is won and the predetermined profit is given is the same or substantially the same among the setting values of the plurality of stages,
In the feature D10, the probability that the common role is won and the predetermined mode is notified is different between the first setting value and the second setting value included in the setting values of the plurality of stages. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D11, when the probability that the predetermined mode corresponding role is won and the predetermined profit is given is the same or substantially the same among the plurality of stages of setting values, it is advantageous among the setting values regarding the provision of the predetermined profit Or, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantage. In addition, the probability that the predetermined mode is notified by winning the common part is different between the first set value and the second set value, so that there is no advantage or disadvantage among the set values with respect to the provision of the predetermined profit. Even with the configuration, it is possible to make the player predict the setting value based on the probability that the predetermined mode is notified and the predetermined profit is given.

Feature D12. Setting means for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (function to execute the processing of step S106 in the main MPU 72);
The probability that the predetermined mode corresponding role is won and the predetermined profit is given is the same or substantially the same among the setting values of the plurality of stages,
There are a plurality of types of predetermined modes,
The selection rate of the type of the predetermined mode to be notified when the common role is won and the predetermined mode is notified is a first set value and a second set value included in the plurality of set values. The game machine according to feature D10 or D11, which is different from

  According to the feature D12, when the probability that the predetermined mode corresponding role is won and the predetermined profit is given is the same or substantially the same among the setting values of the plurality of stages, it is advantageous among the setting values regarding the giving of the predetermined profit Or, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantage. In addition, when the selection ratio of the type of the predetermined mode to be notified when the common role is won and the predetermined mode is notified, the first set value and the second set value are different to give a predetermined profit. Even in the configuration in which there is no advantage or disadvantage among the set values with regard to, it is possible to make the player predict the set values based on the frequency to be notified for each type of predetermined mode.

  Feature D13. The predetermined profit giving means is capable of giving the predetermined profit when the common part is won, and does not give the predetermined profit when the predetermined mode corresponding part is won. The gaming machine described in D10.

  According to the feature D13, while the predetermined benefit may be awarded when the common winning combination is won, the predetermined benefit is not provided when the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won, so the predetermined manner is not notified. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the establishment of the winning. In this case, even when the winning combination is won, the predetermined mode can be notified, so that not only when the predetermined winning is achieved without being notified, but also when the predetermined winning is realized, the predetermined winning is achieved. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the player.

Feature D14. Setting means for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (function to execute the processing of step S106 in the main MPU 72);
In the feature D13, the probability of winning the common part and informing the predetermined mode is different between the first setting value and the second setting value included in the setting values of the plurality of stages. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D14, it is possible to make the player predict the set value based on the notification of the predetermined mode and the grasping frequency of the predetermined winning. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the notification of the predetermined mode.

Feature D15. Setting means for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (function to execute the processing of step S106 in the main MPU 72);
There are a plurality of types of predetermined modes,
The selection rate of the type of the predetermined mode to be notified when the common role is won and the predetermined mode is notified is a first set value and a second set value included in the plurality of set values. The game machine according to feature D13 or D14, which is different from the above.

  According to the feature D15, it is possible to cause the player to predict the setting value based on the type of the predetermined mode which is the notification target when the predetermined mode is notified after the predetermined mode is notified. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of the predetermined mode to be notified.

  Feature D16. The second notification means is notified of a first predetermined mode as the predetermined mode when the common winning combination is won in the lottery process of the combination in a situation where the second set value is the first set value, and the second set value is the second set value. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D13 to D15, wherein the first predetermined mode is not notified when the common combination is won in a lottery process of the combination in a certain situation.

  According to the feature D16, when the first predetermined mode is notified and the predetermined profit is given, it is determined that the first set value is not the second set value. Thus, the player pays attention to whether or not the first predetermined mode is notified.

Feature D17. When the predetermined mode corresponding role is won and the predetermined mode is notified by the first notification execution means (image display device 63) by the control of the first notification means, the type corresponds to the type of the predetermined mode notified. The notification control means (function to execute the process of step S2203 in the main side MPU 72) which causes the display to be executed by the second notification execution means (special display unit 100),
The notification control means is configured to cause a number corresponding to the first set value to be displayed by the second notification execution means when the first predetermined state is notified by the first notification execution means. The gaming machine according to feature D16, comprising:

  According to the feature D17, it is possible to grasp whether or not it is the first set value by grasping the display content of the second notification execution means when the first predetermined mode is informed.

  Feature D18. When the predetermined mode is notified by the first notification execution means when the common role is won, the notification control means causes the common display to be the common display regardless of the type of the predetermined aspect being notified. A gaming machine according to a feature D17, characterized in that it comprises means for causing the notification to be performed by the notification execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S2507 in the main MPU 72).

  According to the feature D18, when the common combination is won and the first notification execution means notifies the predetermined manner, the common indication indicates the second notification execution means regardless of the type of the predetermined manner notified. It takes place at On the other hand, when the first predetermined mode is notified by winning the predetermined mode corresponding combination, a number corresponding to the first set value is displayed by the second notification execution means. Thereby, in order to grasp that it is the first set value when the first predetermined mode is notified and the predetermined profit is given, the case where the predetermined mode corresponding role is won and the first predetermined mode is notified It is necessary for the player to store the contents of the second notification execution means in the above.

  Even if any one or a plurality of configurations among features A1 to A15, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D18, and features E1 to E7 are applied to the features D1 to D18. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
Combination lottery means (function of executing processing of step S401 to step S408 in the main side MPU 72) that executes lottery processing of combination based on the fact that the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop fluctuation display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
When the start operation means is operated and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the pattern is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Symbol display control means (a function for executing the reel rotation process and the reel stop process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means;
After the change display of the pattern, when the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as formation of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination Executing means (function of executing the processing of step S309 and step S1110 in the main MPU 72);
Setting means (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
In the gaming machine provided with
The symbol is displayed when the result of the lottery process of the combination is a special result (index value IV = 4 in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in a situation where the setting value is the first setting value among the setting values of the plurality of stages The first stop mode can be notified as the stop mode of the variable display, and the result of the lottery process of the winning combination becomes the special result in the situation of the second set value among the plurality of set values. Is characterized by including special notification means (a function for executing a process for dummy notification performed by the main side MPU 72 in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) for preventing notification of the first stop mode. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature E1, when the first stop mode is notified, the possibility of being the first set value instead of the second set value becomes high. Thus, the player pays attention to whether or not the first stop mode is notified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature E2. The special result is a lottery result in which a special winning (bell winning) can be established regardless of whether the stop mode of the variable display of the pattern is the first stop mode or not the first stop mode. The gaming machine according to the feature E1, characterized in that

  According to the feature E2, since the special winning can be established regardless of whether or not it is the first stop mode when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is a special result, the presence or absence of the special winning is affected. It is possible to cause the player to predict the set value by notifying the stop mode when the special result is obtained, while not giving it.

  Feature E3. The predetermined profit giving means (the ninth embodiment) capable of giving a predetermined profit (addition to the number of continued games in ART state) different from the control for the winning combination when the result of the lottery process of the combination becomes the special result. In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2404 in the main MPU 72, the function of executing the processing of step S2604 in the main MPU 72 in the eleventh embodiment, and executing the processing of step S2704 in the main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment. The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2, characterized in that the gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2 comprises a function to execute the processing of step S2804 in the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment.

  According to the feature E3, when the result of the lottery process of the combination becomes a special result, the predetermined profit may be awarded. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the special result that is the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.

  Feature E4. A feature is characterized in that the event that the predetermined profit is given does not occur when the first stop mode is notified and the special winning is realized, other than the result of the lottery process of the combination becoming the special result. The gaming machine described in E3.

  According to the feature E4, when the first stop mode is notified and the special winning is achieved, when the predetermined profit is given, it is determined that it is not the second set value. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the notification of the first stop mode.

  Feature E5. When the result of the lottery process of the combination becomes another result (index values IV = 1 to 3 in the ninth to eleventh embodiments), the first stop mode is notified and the special winning is established On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature E4, wherein the predetermined profit is not awarded.

  According to the feature E5, there are cases where the predetermined profit is awarded and the predetermined profit is not awarded when the first stop mode is notified and the special winning is achieved. Then, when the predetermined profit is given in the situation, it is determined that the second set value is not the second set value. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the first stop mode is notified and the special winning is established.

Feature E6. When the notification of the stop mode is notified by the first notification execution means (image display device 63) by the control of the special notification means, the display corresponding to the type of the stop mode notified is the second notification execution means The notification control means (function to execute the processing of step S2203 in the main MPU 72) to be executed by the special display unit 100),
The notification control means is configured to cause the second notification execution means to display a number corresponding to the first set value when the first stop state is notified by the first notification execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5, comprising:

  According to the feature E6, it is possible to grasp whether or not it is the first set value by grasping the display content of the second notification execution means when the first stop mode is informed.

Feature E7. A predetermined mode corresponding combination (in the ninth to thirteenth embodiments) in which establishment of a predetermined winning is possible when the variable display of the pattern is stopped in a predetermined mode as a combination to be a lottery target in the lottery process of the role Index value IV = 1 to 3) exists,
The special notification means includes means for notifying the first mode by the first notification execution means when the predetermined mode corresponding role is won.
The notification control means, when the stop condition is notified by the first notification execution means when the result of the lottery process of the combination becomes the special result, the kind of the stop condition to be notified The gaming machine according to the feature E6, characterized in that it comprises means (a function for executing the processing of step S2507 in the main MPU 72) for causing common display to be performed by the second notification execution means even if it is present. .

  According to the feature E7, in the case where the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is a special result and the first notification execution means is notified of the stop mode, the common display is made regardless of the type of the stop mode to be notified Is performed by the second notification execution means. On the other hand, when the predetermined mode corresponding role is won and the first stop mode is notified, the number corresponding to the first set value is displayed by the second notification execution means. As a result, when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination becomes a special result and the first stop mode is notified, in order to grasp that it is the first set value, the predetermined mode corresponding winning combination is won for the first stop. It is necessary for the player to store the contents of the second notification execution means when the mode is notified.

  Even if any one or a plurality of configurations among features A1 to A15, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D18, and features E1 to E7 are applied to the features E1 to E7. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention of the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, the feature group D, and the feature group E, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are provided with control means such as a CPU, read-only storage means such as a ROM, and read / write storage means such as a RAM. The control means executes processing in accordance with the program read from the read only storage means while writing information to the read / write storage means and reading information from the storage means. When executing this process, information from a sensor or the like is input to the control means, and information from the control means is output to the electric actuator, the light emitting element, or the like. It is also known that control means, read-only storage means, read / write storage means, etc. are integrated into one chip.

  With regard to the slot machine, specifically, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are betted, a lottery process of winning is performed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process of the winning combination is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and the control means is operated when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel. At this time, the rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player. For example, gaming media are provided as the provision of the benefit.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied will be shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: Start rotation of the orbiter based on the operation of the start operation means, stop rotation of the orbiter based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player according to the pattern after the stop A gaming machine that grants benefits.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Slot machine, 31 reel unit 32L, 32M, 32R reel 41 start lever 42-44 stop button 63 image display device 72 main side MPU 82 effect side MPU 100 Special display.

Claims (1)

Pattern display means for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means operated to start variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
The role lottery means for executing the lottery process of the role based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means operated to stop the variation display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
When the start operation means is operated and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the pattern is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Pattern display control means for controlling the display means;
After the change display of the pattern, when the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed, the control corresponding to the winning combination is executed as formation of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination Execution means,
Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
In the gaming machine provided with
A predetermined profit is awarded with at least one condition that the first winning combination is won in the lottery process of the above-mentioned winning combination or that the first corresponding winning combination corresponding to the first winning combination is won. Providing a predetermined profit giving means;
The probability that the first combination is won and the predetermined profit is given is the same or substantially the same among the setting values of the plurality of stages,
The second combination is present as the combination to be drawn in the lottery process of the combination,
When the second corresponding winning corresponding to the second combination is established, the first corresponding symbol which is any one of the pattern and the combination of the symbols to be stopped when the first corresponding winning is established is stopped and displayed. And
When the second combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the first corresponding symbol is not displayed in a stop display, but a stop display when the first combination is won Another corresponding pattern which is any of a pattern and a combination of patterns that can not be displayed can be stopped and displayed,
When the second combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the case where the first corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed is more advantageous for the player than the case where the other corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed,
The probability of winning the second combination when the gaming status is a predetermined status is different between the first set value and the second set value included in the plurality of set values,
A game machine characterized in that the probability of winning the second role fluctuates according to the game situation .

Images